for windows indestructible keyboards and indispensable ... › myttouch › guide ›...

My-T-Touch®

for Windows

IndestructibleKeyboards and

Indispensable Utilities

Version 1.79

User’s Guide

My-T-Touch®: for Windows; IndestructibleKeyboards and Indispensable Utilities; Version1.79; User’s Guide

IMG Real World Press179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 934461-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)+1-818-701-1579+1-818-936-0200 (fax)Website: http://www.imgpresents.comTo report errors, please send a note to [email protected] Real World Press is a division of Innovation Management Group, Inc.My-T-Touch, Version 1.79, 9/17/2012Copyright © 1993-2012 by Innovation Management Group, Inc.Production/Editing/Composition/Indexing/Publishing: IMG Real World Press

Notice of RightsAll Rights Reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or

transmitted in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of the publisher. For information on obtaining permission for

reprints, excerpts, or other uses, please contact [email protected]

TrademarksMy-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and My-T-Soft® are registered

trademarks of Innovation Management Group, Inc.

Any other product name, service, or company identified within the book is

used for informational or editorial purposes only, and with no intention of

infringment of any trademark. No such use is intended to convey

endorsement or other affiliation with this book.

Notice of liabilityThe information in this book is distributed on an "As is" basis, without

warranty. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this

book, IMG Real World Press shall not have any liability to any person or

entity with respect to any loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused

directly or indirectly by any information contained in this book or the

product(s) described. The publisher takes no responsibility for any errors

or omissions.

ISBN 978-0-557-96959-3

Table of ContentsPart I. Getting Started................................. xi

1. Quick Start .........................................12. Getting Started ...................................7

My-T-Touch User’s Guide............7Using this Guide .........................10What is My-T-Touch?.................13Why do I need My-T-Touch? .....16Features.......................................17What You Need...........................20Installing / Un-Installing

My-T-Touch ......................21Starting My-T-Touch ..................27Licensing Information ................28License Manager ........................30Tutorial and Standard Settings....41My-T-Touch Setup......................43

General Information onMy-T-Touch Setup...45

iv

Commonly Asked Questions ......50Customer Support .......................59Product Catalog ..........................62

Part II. Using My-T-Touch..........................683. My-T-Touch Panels ..........................70

General Operation ......................70Tool Bar Panel and Keys ............71Control Panel and Keys ..............74Keyboard Panels and Keys .........77Windows Control Panels and Keys

80Macro Panels and Keys ..............85Calculator Panel..........................87Quick Help Panel........................90System Information Panel ..........90Magnifier Panel ..........................91Touch Panel ................................93

4. My-T-Touch Menu ...........................99My-T-Touch Menu......................99

5. My-T-Touch Setup .........................109

v

My-T-Touch Setup - Overview.109Help ..........................................115Change My-T-Touch Configuration

115My-T-Touch Panel Selection

Dialog Box ............124Operation Options...........126Interface Settings ............134Key Options ....................137My-T-Touch Special

Handling Dialog Box143

My-T-Touch Panel MotionDialog Box ............153

My-T-Touch Size SelectionsDialog Box ............154

System Information DisplayDialog Box ............157

My-T-Touch Colors DialogBox ........................158

vi

My-T-Touch BackgroundColors Dialog Box.164

Fonts................................165Select Keyboard Layouts..........169

Keyboard Layouts &Windows................179

Advanced Notes onKeyboard Layouts .181

Build-A-Macro .........................196Information on Advanced Macro

Editing.............................204Add-A-Macro Dialog Box

205Delete-A-Macro Dialog Box

206Document Macro Dialog

Box ........................208Document All Macros

Dialog Box ............210Documentation File Save

Dialog Box ............211vii

Macro Key Dialog Box ...212Macro Panel Dialog Box.215Macro Zoom Dialog Box220Macro Select Dialog Box226Active Window Dialog Box

226Configure your Mouse Buttons 228Select the Cursor and Icon........233Exit My-T-Touch ......................236

6. My-T-Touch Logon Utilities ..........238My-T-Touch Logon Utilities

Overview.........................238My-T-Touch Logon Utilities for

Windows Vista / 7 ...........239Setup / Configure Logon

Utility ....................241Configure Automatic Logon

for Windows Vista / 7256

viii

Part III. My-T-Touch TechnicalDocumentation .................................2607. Advanced User Notes.....................263

Advanced User Notes &Information .....................263

Final Release Notes ..................265Important User Notes ...............272Technical Notes ........................274Application Notes.....................276Windows Developers ................282About this product ....................284Customer Suggestions ..............290

8. Files & File Notes & InstallationInformation ...............................293My-T-Touch Files & File Notes &

Installation Information ..293Installation Information ..313Deployment Information.320

9. Operation Notes .............................327My-T-Touch Operation and

Release Notes..................327ix

EGA Users................................327Year 2038 Limitations ..............328Windows Menus .......................329Keyboard Notes ........................330Build-A-Macro Notes...............335Memory ....................................347Command Line Options ...........347Build-A-Board Support ............364My-T-Touch Button Display.....367My-T-Touch Setup | Configuration

| Special ...........................368Windows Notes.........................370Sounds (Advanced Notes) ........371

10. Initialization File Documentation(MYTTOUCH.INI) ..................382My-T-Touch Initialization File

Documentation(MYTTOUCH.INI).........382

11. Error Messages and Numbers ......578My-T-Touch Error Messages ....578

Index............................................................589x

Part I. GettingStarted

General informationabout this guide, theproduct, installation,and getting started

(how to get My-T-Touchrunning).

Chapter 1 - Quick Start contains details onthe fastest way to install & begin using

My-T-Touch

Chapter 2 - Getting Started has moreinformation about this guide, My-T-Touchfeatures, Installing / Un-Installing, LicensingInformation, Standard Settings, usingMy-T-Touch Setup, Commonly AskedQuestions, and information about CustomerSupport.

Chapter 1. Quick StartInstall My-T-Touch

There are various ways to obtain IMGsoftware, including (but not limited to):

• Web based / Internet download from IMG’sweb site(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm)

• Shipped CD / DVD physical media - IMGProduct Disc

• Download ISO image file and burn IMGProduct Disc CD / DVD

• USB Flash Drive (pre-installed or installedfrom USB media web download)

• Single file install (from local network /internet / other media)

• IMG on-line account

1

Chapter 1. Quick Start

Note: IMG Software is built by product andmajor version with minor releases. Thereis only 1 unique build, but can bepackaged / delivered / obtained in variousways. When unlicensed, the software actsas a demonstration / evaluation copy, andoperation will be limited in length orrun-time or capabilities. Once licensed(typically via License Key and SerialNumber, or OEM / Company-wide /Enterprise licensing), the software willoperate with no limitations.

Recommendation: The quickest andeasiest method for obtaining IMG softwareis to download the current version fromIMG’s web site(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm).Download, then run the file to install. Test,review, play with, and verify the softwaremeets your needs and requirements.

2


When ready to purchase, go to the IMGLicense Manager, and click on the"Purchase License Now" button. If workingon a machine without internet access, usethe Standard or MSI single file download,or use a Product Disc option. Separately,purchase the license for the productdirectly on the website - once you haveyour License Key and Serial Number, youcan install and license the software.

The following outlines a standard retailProduct Disc based install. For other options,refer to notes and details available at thesource. In general, the approach is to install thesoftware, then license the software. TheProduct Disc Installation Assistant provides aneasy way to accomplish these two tasks.

• In Windows, insert the CD or DVD - the

3


AutoRun feature will load the InstallationAssistant - you may Install a licensedproduct , Install other product demos, orview Release Information. If you have aCertificate of Authenticity, enter yourLicense Key, Serial Number, and Name toInstall and automatically License.

• If AutoRun is not enabled:

• In Windows, Click on the Start Button

• Select Run

• Select D:SETUP, or type D:SETUP (orE:SETUP if CD/DVD drive E:, etc.)

• Press (ENTER) or click on OK

• In Windows Vista / 7, you may not have theRun Option - select Computer, yourCD/DVD drive, and open Setup

• Answer the questions and follow theinstructions on your screen

4


WarningServer Installation(Terminal Server /Terminal Services)Note:When installingon a server, for properoperation, you MUSTinstall the software fromthe Control Panel |Add/Remove Programsicon.

Note: You may also Un-Install My-T-Touchby running SETUP.EXE After My-T-Touchhas been properly installed. (My-T-TouchSetup will ask you if you wish toUn-Install.) This has been provided as aconvenience to the user. It isrecommended that you use the ControlPanel | Add/Remove Programs Icon toremove My-T-Touch.

5


Start My-T-Touch

Click on the Start Button, and open the StartMenu.

Select (All) Programs, then SelectMy-T-Touch. The My-T-Touch menu will haveselections corresponding to the icons in thegroup. Select My-T-Touch to begin operation.

The My-T-Touch Welcome will automaticallyrun after install. The Tutorial and this manualcan be used to learn all the features andcapabilities of My-T-Touch.

6

Chapter 2. GettingStarted

My-T-Touch User’s GuideVersion 1.79

9/17/2012

A Utility for Windows

Information in this document is subject tochange without notice and does not represent acommitment on the part of InnovationManagement Group, Inc. The softwaredescribed in this document is furnished under alicense agreement or nondisclosure agreement.The software and documentation may be usedor copied only in accordance with the terms of

7

Chapter 2. Getting Started

this agreement. It is against the law to copy thesoftware on any medium except as specificallyallowed in the license or nondisclosureagreement. The purchaser may be allowed tomake a back-up copy. No part of this manual orguide may be reproduced or transmitted in anyform or by any means, electronic ormechanical, including photocopying,recording, or information storage and retrievalsystems, for any purpose other than thepurchasers personal use, without the expresswritten permission of Innovation ManagementGroup, Inc.

This manual and product represent over 19years of on-going development, testing, andsupport. There are numerous legal, license, andcross-license agreements associated with theend product. Licensed users of the software areone of the most important aspects of the entireprocess that brings this manual and product

8


into existence. Please be respectful of allparties involved.

Trademarks:

Microsoft Windows is a trademark ofMicrosoft Corporation.

My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® andMy-T-Soft® are registered trademarks ofInnovation Management Group, Inc.

Patents:

This product was produced under U.S. PatentNo. 4,725,694.

Copyrights

My-T-Touch Copyright © 1993-2012Innovation Management Group, Inc.

My-T-Touch User’s Guide Copyright ©1993-2012 Innovation Management Group,Inc.

9


All Rights Reserved. Software Subject toRestricted Rights.

Using this GuideThis guide is a comprehensive collection ofdetails, notes, and information aboutMy-T-Touch. Portions are incorporated withinthe product itself, and it is also available invarious forms (e.g. printed, on-line, PDF, etc.).

Important User Information

This guide is for users who are familiar withWindows, its basic concepts, and how tooperate within Windows. If you are not, theinformation you may need to fully utilizeMy-T-Touch and this guide may be limited.You may wish to review Windows help,tutorials, and other available information on

10


using and operating Windows beforecontinuing using this guide.

Product Versions

In order to address various customer needs andrequirements, there are numerous versions,customizations, and special releases available.This guide is created from a single source, andcan contain references and information aboutother versions, capabilities, and features thatmay NOT be represented in the version you areusing. In some places within this guide, theremay be mentions of other supporting softwarethat are part of the IMG family of products.

• Build-A-Board - customizable keyboardlayout generator with support for multipleplatforms

• CrossScanner - complete Windows accessfrom a single-switch (for users who can’t

11


use standard input devices)

• Joystick-To-Mouse - enables point andclick operation within Windows from ajoystick or gaming device

• Touchright Utilities - right-click access fortouchscreens and other pointing devices

Specific notes for these and other products maybe found within this guide.

Conventions used within this guide

Note: Notes and other additionalinformation will be indicated in this way

12


WarningSpecial and otherimportant details to payclose attention to willappear this way

What is My-T-Touch?My-T-Touch provides on-screen keyboards,buttons, and utilities that allow Pens,Touchscreens, and other pointing devices tooperate Windows Vista / 7 without the need fora physical keyboard or membrane panel. Thisproduct is the culmination of over 19 years ofon-going development, customer support &feedback, and meeting the needs of usersthroughout the world.

13


My-T-Touch Software is intended to provide allthe functionality of a keyboard without using akeyboard, thus allowing the user to remain onthe primary input device at all times. With mostapplications being driven by the GraphicalUser Interface (GUI) point & click approach,My-T-Touch completes the user / operatorinterface with its heads-up display and is idealfor users who need to go to the keyboard onlyoccasionally. My-T-Touch is ideal for kiosks,controlled applications, industrial / hazardousenvironments, challenged users, or anywherethe Man-Machine-Interface (MMI / HMI)needs to be intuitive and practical. Using theOperator mode & Show / Hide Key options, aSupervisor can configure My-T-Touch forsecure applications, network logons, passwordentry, and various other controlled inputsituations. My-T-Touch is also a very usefultool for quick Macros and Windowscommands. My-T-Touch has various screen

14


sizes and its option panels can expand andretract dependent upon your requirements.

Note: My-T-Touch is available in manyforms, by many names, and can trace itshistory back to My-T-Mouse, originallyintroduced to the world at Fall COMDEX1993 (when COMDEX, i.e. the ComputerDealers Exposition, was the premier tradeshow for everything happening in thecomputer industry - My-T-Mouse wasfeatured as one of the highlights of theshow in a program called "ComputerChronicles" (a well known series that ranfrom 1981 through 2002). You can find thisarchived video [Computer Chronicles FallCOMDEX 1993] at the Internet Archive(http://www.archive.org)). There areversions that support Windows 3.0 / 3.1,Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Windows NT,Windows 2000, Windows XP, WindowsVista, Windows 7, Embedded versions(NT/XP & Windows CE), and all Windows

15


Server versions. Other operating system &platform support can be found inBuild-A-Board, the next generation of theMy-T-Soft software.

Why do I need My-T-Touch?My-T-Touch is intended to give the user all thefunctionality of a keyboard without using akeyboard. Because the software is auser-interface enhancement, and a functionalreplacement for a physical keyboard in manycases, the software is used throughout theworld for both simple and complex tasks...

My-T-Mouse is... (the original)

My-Typing-Mouse - The Software That MakeYour Mouse a Mouse That Types!

16


My-T-Pen is...

My-Typing-Pen - The Software That MakesYour Pen a Pen That Types!

My-T-Touch is...

My-Typing-Touchscreen - The Software ThatMakes Your Touchscreen a Touchscreen ThatTypes!

My-T-Soft is...

My-Typing-Software - The Software ThatTypes!

Features

• Seamless operation from Mouse, Trackball,Touchscreen, Pen, or any other pointingdevice

17


• Microsoft Windows Vista / 7 Compatible

• Workstation / Network Logon Options

• Developer Tool Kit and Extensions

• Developer examples of integrating intoexisting applications

• Supervisor / Operator Modes

• Show & Hide Keys

• Selectable Sizes

• Realistic 3D graphics

• Infinite Sizing

• Support for Build-A-Board layouts -completely customizable user interface

• 11 panels, individually selectable, or createyour own with Build-A-Board

• Great for editing - Quick & Easy!

18


• Special Windows Short-cut Keyboard -Power Users Dream!

• 101 & 104 key layouts

• Multiple Keyboard Layouts with ABCLayout for Non-Typists

• International support - numerous keyboardlayouts from around the world

• Create Macro Keys & Panels

• Specific Key & Key Combination Enable /Disable

• Attach Executable programs to Keys & KeyCombos or Window Activation

• Includes the Calculator with Calculator Tape& Send Feature

• Time & Date Display

• Memory, Disk Space, Resources statusDisplay

19


• Completely Configurable for all of yourneeds

• Built-In Magnifier

• Color-code Panels for easy identification

• On-line Quick Help for First-Time Users

• Minimizes to a Button for convenient access

• Once you use it, you won’t want to livewithout it!

• Keyboard not required (Just Say No... toyour Keyboard.)

• End-user and Developer Support

What You NeedTo run My-T-Touch you need the followingequipment (hardware requirements):

20


• IBM 80386 or higher or compatible

• 200 mb hard disk space available

• 32 mb memory or higher

• Windows Vista / 7

• EGA or higher resolution monitor, VGA orSVGA recommended

• Any Windows supported pointing device

Installing / Un-InstallingMy-T-Touch

There are various ways to obtain IMGsoftware, including (but not limited to):

• Web based / Internet download from IMG’sweb site

21


(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm)

• Shipped CD / DVD physical media - IMGProduct Disc

• Download ISO image file and burn IMGProduct Disc CD / DVD

• USB Flash Drive (pre-installed or installedfrom USB media web download)

• Single file install (from local network /internet / other media)

• IMG on-line account

Note: IMG Software is built by product andmajor version with minor releases. Thereis only 1 unique build, but can bepackaged / delivered / obtained in variousways. When unlicensed, the software actsas a demonstration / evaluation copy, andoperation will be limited in length orrun-time or capabilities. Once licensed(typically via License Key and Serial

22


Number, or OEM / Company-wide /Enterprise licensing), the software willoperate with no limitations.

Recommendation: The quickest andeasiest method for obtaining IMG softwareis to download the current version fromIMG’s web site(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm).Download, then run the file to install. Test,review, play with, and verify the softwaremeets your needs and requirements.When ready to purchase, go to the IMGLicense Manager, and click on the"Purchase License Now" button. If workingon a machine without internet access, usethe Standard or MSI single file download,or use a Product Disc option. Separately,purchase the license for the productdirectly on the website - once you haveyour License Key and Serial Number, you

23


can install and license the software.

The following outlines a standard retailProduct Disc based install. For other options,refer to notes and details available at thesource. In general, the approach is to install thesoftware, then license the software. TheProduct Disc Installation Assistant provides aneasy way to accomplish these two tasks.

• In Windows, insert the CD or DVD - theAutoRun feature will load the InstallationAssistant - you may Install a licensedproduct , Install other product demos, orview Release Information. If you have aCertificate of Authenticity, enter yourLicense Key, Serial Number, and Name toInstall and automatically License.

• If AutoRun is not enabled:

24


• In Windows, Click on the Start Button

• Select Run

• Select D:SETUP, or type D:SETUP (orE:SETUP if CD / DVD drive E:, etc.)

• Press (ENTER) or click on OK

• In Windows Vista / 7, you may not have theRun Option - select Computer, yourCD/DVD drive, and open Setup

• Answer the questions and follow theinstructions on your screen

25


WarningServer Installation(Terminal Server /Terminal Services)Note: When installingon a server, for properoperation, you MUSTinstall the software fromthe Control Panel |Add/Remove Programsicon as Administrator.

Note: You may also Un-Install My-T-Touchby running SETUP.EXE After My-T-Touchhas been properly installed. (My-T-TouchSetup will ask you if you wish toUn-Install.) This has been provided as aconvenience to the user. It isrecommended that you use the ControlPanel | Add/Remove Programs Icon toremove My-T-Touch.

26


Starting My-T-TouchClick on the Start Button, and open the StartMenu. Select (All) Programs, then SelectMy-T-Touch. The My-T-Touch menu will haveselections corresponding to the icons in thegroup. Select My-T-Touch to begin operation.

The My-T-Touch Welcome will automaticallyrun the first time you load My-T-Touch.

The following icons will also be available inthe My-T-Touch group:

My-T-Touch Welcome - Opening Welcome,access to tutorial, documents, product

My-T-Touch - runs My-T-Touch!

My-T-Touch Setup - Configuration options27


Licensing Information - Displays currentlicense status of My-T-Touch, allows instantlicensing

Install Developer’s Kit - Tool to allow quickinstallation Developer’s Kit

My-T-Touch Logon Utilities - SetupMy-T-Touch for Windows logon, or AutoLogon

Licensing InformationMy-T-Touch uses the IMG License Manager tomanage the licensed use of this product. Ifunlicensed, the product will run as demo (i.e. ademonstration version). In the demo(unlicensed) mode, My-T-Touch will run forabout an hour (or 250 keystrokes), and thenexit, displaying the license manager

28


(announcing that it is unlicensed). You mayrestart My-T-Touch up to 100 times (thedemonstration period limit). After thedemonstration period is over, My-T-Touch willnot operate unless it is licensed. For extendedevaluation and testing purposes, please contactIMG Customer Service for an evaluationlicense. Once licensed, the operation will notbe limited in any way.

The most common methods of licensing areelectronic (web/e-mail based) and bycertificate (Certificate of Authenticity). In bothcases, there will be a registered serial number,and a license key made available once a licensehas been purchased - these need to be enteredinto the IMG License Manager to activate avalid license. For further details, refer to theIMG License Manager.

Note: There are numerous license

29


schemes (including OEM, site, &enterprise licenses) available to meet theneeds of all our customers. If you haveany licensing questions, please contactInnovation Management Group, Inc.directly.

License ManagerIn order to License My-T-Touch, the correctLicense Key and Serial Number must beentered into the IMG License Manager, alongwith some text for the Customer (and optionalCompany) text areas. The License Key andSerial Number can be found on the Certificateof Authenticity, or in the Software UnlockCodes e-mail.

30


My-T-Touch LicenseManager - Authentication

The License Key and Serial No. entries are amatched pair, and will work together to unlockthe software. The Customer entry is required(i.e. some text must be entered in the Customertext area), but is not part of the license unlockprocess. The Company text area is optional,

31


and will be shown as the Source when theproduct is licensed.

To quickly and easily license the software (on asystem that has internet access), simply clickon the "Purchase License Now" button. Onceconnected to IMG’s website, you will be askedto enter billing information and paymentinformation. Once paid, your order will beprocessed, and you will receive a confirmatione-mail and a separate e-mail with licenseinformation. Once the order is fully processed,you can then click the "Retrieve PurchasedLicense" button to automatically license yoursystem.

System ID Note: The System ID is usedto accurately match the Product andVersion you wish to license with theLicense Information provided. If thesystem you wish to License does not haveInternet Access, you can use the Copy

32


System ID to Clipboard to accurately copythe System ID to the clipboard (which canbe saved in a text file or other documentand moved to a system that does haveInternet Access).

Note: The "Retrieve Purchased License"uses a unique identifier to automaticallylicense your system (which is only sent ifthe "Purchase License Now" is used). Ifyou try this on a different system, or after asystem update or re-install (or after achange to this unique ID), the software willnot license automatically. You will eitherneed to enter the License Key and SerialNumber, or go into Additional LicenseOptions (see below) and use your OrderConfirmation Number and Order E-mail toretrieve the license.

33


Important Note: Be sure to save and/orprint your Order Confirmation number(with Order E-mail), along with yourLicense Key and Serial Number in caseyou need to re-license the software in thefuture (Operating System Re-install, harddisk reformat, new system, etc.)

Certificate of Authenticity Note: ForElectronic Licenses, and Certificate ofAuthenticity can be retrieved on IMG’swebsite:https://www.imgpresents.com/orders/account/licmanager.htm.This requires a valid License Key andSerial Number. Once entered, you mayview a PDF of the Certificate, or downloadthe Certificate of Authenticity PDF file (forprinting or saving).

34


My-T-Touch LicenseManager - AdditionalLicense Options

The Additional License Options section hastools and options to Enter or Paste Evaluationor Other License Information; Request andRetrieve Evaluation Licenses; Support Options

35


to View and Delete (Reset) the License file;and a mechanism to retrieve a PurchasedLicense by entering the Order ConfirmationNumber and the Order E-mail address.

Often, interested parties want to review or testthe software without the demonstration licenselimitations, and to accommodate this, IMGmakes available Evaluation Licenses. TheseEvaluation Licenses are fully functionallicenses, but with a date limit (when theevaluation date has passed, the software willreturn back to the Unlicensed, Demonstrationmode).

Evaluation Licenses may be requested at theProduct Download pages on the website, or byusing the Request / Retrieve EvaluationLicense button here. Note that all EvaluationLicense requests are reviewed, and EvaluationLicenses must be created by IMG personnel(generation is not automated).

36


An Evaluation License sent via e-mail containsa block of text that has the license details forthe License Manager. When sent via e-mail,the text can be copied and subsequently pastedinto the text area here (Paste Text fromClipboard), then saved to enable (set) theLicense Information (Save License Info).

Alternatively, if an Evaluation License isRequested, then after processing, it may beautomatically Retrieved directly by clickingthe Request / Retrieve Evaluation Licensebutton. Please refer to any additionalinformation provided by the messages shownwhen using this approach.

The View Current License File(LICENSE.LIC) button will load the fileLICENSE.LIC from the installation folder.This file contains the actual license informationfor the product, or the license information usedto validate a License Key and Serial Number.

37


Note: Because an Evaluation Licenseuses this same file, the Delete (Reset)option should be used if Licensing theproduct after using an Evaluation License.

The Delete (Reset) License File(LICENSE.LIC) will remove the existingLICENSE.LIC, then copy the fileLICENSE.ORG to LICENSE.LIC (both in theinstallation folder). The file LICENSE.ORG isthe "as shipped" license file, and should be theLicense File when using a License Key andSerial Number to license the software.

Note: For License Purposes, using theSupport Option to Delete (Reset) theLicense File is essentially the same asun-installing, then re-installing thesoftware. Because this option is quickerand simpler, it is the preferred approach to

38


resolve any license issues. Note thatmanually copying the file LICENSE.ORGto LICENSE.LIC (in the installation folder)performs the same operation as thisoption.

The License Retrieval Option will retrieveLicense Information from IMG’s Website forelectronically purchased licenses. The OrderConfirmation Number and Order E-mail isrequired (which appear on the OrderConfirmation page provided after successfullyplacing an on-line order, and are providedseparately via an Order Confirmation E-mail).

Note: For Retrieved Licenses (via RetrievePurchased License, and via the RetrieveLicense Support Option), License Key andSerial Number information is processedexactly as if this information was directly

39


entered in the Authentication area.Therefore, all issues that may affectlicensing also apply to these automatedoptions (e.g. License File status, Userpermissions, etc.)

My-T-Touch LicenseManager - Licensed Display

40


When properly Licensed, a screen similar tothis will show the License Information for theproduct. The display of this indicates that thesoftware is Licensed.

Note: Evaluation licenses also show thisscreen during the days that the EvaluationLicense is valid.

Tutorial and StandardSettings

The My-T-Touch tutorial explains each of thepanels and keys available. Following is adescription of the standard settings forMy-T-Touch and a brief description of thepanels that are initially displayed. The tutorial

41


and Section II of this manual will explain eachkey and panel in detail. The My-T-TouchTutorial may be run from the My-T-TouchWelcome window or by selecting Tutorial fromthe My-T-Touch Menu.

Settings in the standard configuration

Left Mouse button (or pen or touchscreen tap)is set to press a key. Right Mouse button (ifsupported by touchscreen / pointing devicedriver) is for opening the My-T-Touch menu.

The following panels are initially displayed:

The Keyboard Panels

With a document or input window open, a leftbutton click on any key on the alpha panel, editpanel, and numeric panel, acts exactly likepressing the corresponding key on thekeyboard.

The My-T-Touch Tool Bar

42


The Tool (top) button when clicked will openand close the My-T-Touch Control Panel,which gives you access to the keys for theother available panels and actions.

The middle button will pop-up theMy-T-Touch Menu

The bottom button will minimize My-T-Touchto either an icon or a button as set in theconfiguration.

The My-T-Touch Control Panel

Click on each button to open or close theindicated panel(s). The blue letters indicate anopen panel, black letters a closed panel.

Change the size of My-T-Touch (SzUp, SzDn).

Exit My-T-Touch. (Exit)

43


My-T-Touch SetupTo run My-T-Touch Setup:

Open the Start Menu, Select (All) Programs,Select My-T-Touch, then select theMy-T-Touch Setup icon in the My-T-TouchProgram Group Menu.

OR

From My-T-Touch, click the My-T-Touchmenu button on the tool bar and clickMy-T-Touch Setup.

OR

From My-T-Touch, open the Main MacroPanel, and click on the button labeled "Setup"

If My-T-Touch is running while you areselecting options from the following setupscreens it will change to the new settingsimmediately after you click OK to save thechanges. You do not need to restart

44


My-T-Touch to configure it with the newsettings. On each screen you may also chooseto click Cancel to exit without saving the newsettings.

Once you have created a configuration that youwish to keep, you may wish to save it soMy-T-Touch will re-open in the sameconfiguration and screen position. To save aconfiguration or position, open theMy-T-Touch Menu, select Current Settings,and select Save to Save Current Settings(and/or Select Position, Save Current Position).Once saved, My-T-Touch will always open inthe saved configuration until anotherconfiguration is saved.

In the Operator Mode, My-T-Touch Setup willrequire a password to allow changes. SeeSpecial Handling for information about theOperator Mode.

45


General Information onMy-T-Touch SetupOK

The OK button will save all your changes.

CANCEL

The CANCEL button will ignore any changesyou have made, and restore your previousconfiguration.

Pull-down Box

46


This is a Pull-down Box.

Radio Button

47


These are a Radio Buttons.

Active Application

The Active Application is always identified asfollows:

1. It has the input focus (the blinking cursor).

2. The Caption (Window Title) bar is coloredin the highlighted color.

Cursors

This is a Cursor.

Icons48


This is an Icon.

Check-Buttons

These are Check-box Buttons.

Panels

49


This is an example of a My-T-Touch Panel.

Commonly Asked QuestionsCompatibility

1. Does My-T-Touch work with all WindowsApplications?

Yes.

50


2. Does My-T-Touch run in DOS?

No, My-T-Touch is a Windows Application,although you may operate DOS applications ina DOS Window. For example, try the DOSMacro Panel to see the command prompt in awindow.

Display

3. My-T-Touch covers too much of myWindow. What can I do?

a) Resize and/or reconfigure My-T-Touch. b)My-T-Touch can be minimized to a button, andwill reside in the upper left corner of youractive window. This way you can quickly openthe My-T-Touch window when you need it. c)Set your second or third Mouse Button to"Look Through My-T-Touch." d) Work withDeveloper’s Kit to allow on-demand display

4. Why doesn’t My-T-Touch open the way Ilast closed it?

51


My-T-Touch always opens and first displayswith the settings that are saved. To assure thatMy-T-Touch opens the way you desire,configure My-T-Touch and then Open theMy-T-Touch Menu, Select "Current Settings"and then Select "Save Current Settings" fromthe pop-up Menu. My-T-Touch will nowremember these settings and open with thecurrent configuration. You can also save theScreen position where My-T-Touch firstappears by Saving Current Position from theMy-T-Touch Menu. Note that the Developer’sKit allows extrenal control of settings If thereare pre-defined configurations & settings thatare controlled externally via anotherapplication, then this may override the defaultaction of the software. Check with your systemadministrator for more details.

5. My-T-Touch Interferes with myapplication’s Display. What can I do?

52


Some Windows Applications do not handle thescreen display properly, and don’t expect anyother window to be displayed over theapplications’ window. Since My-T-Touch candisplay over any window, sometimes a displayconflict can occur. Refer to the Advanced UserInformation .

My-T-Touch Operation

6. How do I view the Cursor in theMagnifier?

The Magnifier Cursor indicator is Set On inSetup-Configuration-Panels.

7. When I press a key on My-T-Touch itdoesn’t do what I expect (or does nothing).What is the problem? Usually this occurswhen the key pressed on My-T-Touch actuallydoes nothing in the active window, or what youdidn’t expect - verify this by using yourcomputer’s actual keyboard. Remember that

53


only one window can be active at a time, andthe active window receives all keyboard andMy-T-Touch keystrokes.

8. Why doesn’t the pause key work?

Due to the nature of the Windows operatingenvironment, most applications can not stopthe operation of the system in an acceptablemanner. My-T-Touch actually does send theproper Windows Keyboard Events, but mostapplications ignore this key.

9. Why doesn’t the Print Screen Key printthe whole screen?

The Print Screen Key on My-T-Touch capturesthe image of the Active Window. Maximize thewindow by pressing MAX on the My-T-TouchWindows Control Panel, and then use the PrintScreen Key.

10. My Macro doesn’t work properly. Whatis the problem?

54


The Keystroke macro feature is relatively easyto setup and use, however doing complexkeystroke macros can be tedious. First, verifythe keystroke combinations and sequence byusing My-T-Touch to perform the Macro, thenverify that the sequence is exactly the same inthe Macro entered. Also, when working withAlt, Control, and Shift keys you must be extracareful that the down and up keystrokescorrespond properly to the way the applicationexpects the keystrokes. For example, to do an[Alt]-F you must use [Alt-Down]F[Alt-Up]. Itmay be necessary to use lowercase lettersinstead of uppercase to work properly withincertain applications. Note that a My-T-TouchKeystroke Macro character represents aKey-Down, and Key-Up sequence. Finally,make sure that the Caps lock is in the samestate as the Keystroke Macro recording. Alsosee notes in the Build-A-Macro section, andAdvanced User Information.

55


11. Why does My-T-Touch Move its positionfor certain windows?

My-T-Touch senses the active window. Whenthe active window is a certain type of window,My-T-Touch will act in certain ways, asconfigured in the initialization file. Forexample, My-T-Touch moves off of WindowsDialog boxes, so the information required bythe application is not obscured by My-T-Touch.All of these settings can be modified, but acertain level of understanding of Windows isrequired. Refer to Operation Options and/orAdvanced User Information .

Memory

12. How Much Memory does My-T-Touchuse while running?

This depends on your screen display colors(16, 256, etc.), and the current My-T-Touchconfiguration. Normal operation requires less

56


than 100K RAM. If My-T-Touch runs slow oryou have memory problems see "SystemMemory Note" in the Advanced User Notes.

13. Is My-T-Touch a TSR (Terminate andStay Resident)? [the original product wasreleased so long ago that this was once acommonly asked question - it is left here forperspective]

My-T-Touch is a normal Windows Application.Nothing stays resident once My-T-Touch isClosed.

International Operation

14. What do I need to do to operateMy-T-Touch with an InternationalKeyboard layout?

You must select the desired keyboard displayfor My-T-Touch and then set the properkeyboard layout in the Windows Control Panelfor proper operation.

57


15. Does My-T-Touch Translate?

No.

Input Devices

16. Can I Operate my Computer without aKeyboard?

Yes, but special BIOS may be required. Mostsystems allow your computer to boot-upwithout a Physical Keyboard - sometimes thisisn’t intuitive, and may require settings forerrors rather than the keyboard. As long asWindows is automatically started, you may runMy-T-Touch on a system without a keyboard.

17. Does My-T-Touch require a Mouse?

No, but My-T-Touch does require at least sometype of pointing device that emulates a mouseto the extent that the user can move the cursorand click on at least one button. MostTouchscreen and Pen drivers support this type

58


of interface. Contact your touchscreen or penmanufacturer for more information oncompatible drivers.

18. Does My-T-Touch require any specialdrivers?

No. My-T-Touch works with all standardWindows drivers supplied by all well-knowntouchscreen manufacturers / dealers.

19. Does My-T-Touch operate with pens,joysticks, touchscreens, digitizer pads, andother pointing devices?

Yes, as long as they truly emulate the mousecursor movement and mouse button clicks.Contact Innovation Management Group, Inc.regarding My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®,My-T-Touch® & My-T-Soft®.

59


Customer SupportMy-T-Touch Software is backed by a supportstaff trained to provide you with fast, courteousservice. Over the years, IMG has astoundedindividuals at the quality of it software and itssupport. So that we can continue to focus ourresources on development and providinghigh-quality products & support, we doappreciate your assistance in reviewing thehelp, manual, and support informationavailable at our website to see if the problem orquestion has already been addressed. However,if you need assistance beyond what the manual,tutorial, help files, and on-line support databaseprovide, please contact IMG Customer Service:

Innovation Management Group, Inc.Customer Service179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 93446

60


USA1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)+1-818-701-1579+1-818-936-0200 (fax)<[email protected]>http://www.imgpresents.com

To open a Technical Support case and create asupport ticket, please refer tohttps://www.imgpresents.com/orders/support/techsupport.htm.

Please provide, or have the followinginformation ready when you ask for assistance:

• My-T-Touch version number, update level.

• Registered serial number (or if runningdemo)

• Make and Model of your computer.

61


• Windows version number, any Service Packsor major updates.

• A description of the problem.

• If possible, a list of the steps required torecreate the problem.

• If you have seen an error code, record andreport the number.

• Additional information may be required,such as monitor type, type of pointingdevice, amount of RAM in your system,other software running (anti-virus, spyware,virtual machine, etc.).

Product CatalogInnovation Management Group, Inc.’sProducts

62


Commercial DivisionProducts...Indestructible Keyboards & IndispensableUtilities!

My-T-Soft® Build-A-Board

The Ultimate Tool for creating and modifyingOn-Screen Keyboards, buttons, and Panels.My-T-Soft Family, plus Cross-PlatformSupport

My-T-Pen® for Windows

On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for PenBased Systems

My-T-Touch® for Windows

On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities forTouchsreens

My-T-Soft® for Windows

63


On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for anypointing device

My-T-Soft® TS for Terminal Services

On-Screen Keyboards for Terminal Server /Terminal Services

TouchRight Utilities

Right Click Access for Pens & Touchscreens

Assistive TechnologyDivision Products...Enabling Tools for Special Needs

AT Accessibility Suite

IMG’s Assistive Technology Software with sitelicense options

Joystick-To-Mouse

64


The Software That Lets You Run WindowsWith A Joystick!

My-T-Mouse®

The Software That Makes Your Mouse aMouse That Types! Indispensable & Utilitiesfor any Mouse or Trackball

OnScreen

Special Features for disabled & impaired usersWord Prediction / Word Completion / WindowControl / Scanning

OnScreen with CrossScanner

Complete control of Windows from a singleswitch! Support for Keyboard, Mouse, Joystickinterfaces

SmartClick

Operate Windows without the need toPress/Click a Button

65


The Magnifier

Area and Full Screen Magnifier, CursorLocator, Visual Aids

WordComplete

Word Completion, adaptive word prediction,Word List Management, etc. Type Better, TypeLess - we do the rest!

For further information...Contact your Local Software Dealer

or

Innovation Management Group, Inc.179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 93446USA1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)+1-818-701-1579

66


+1-818-936-0200 (fax)<[email protected]>http://www.imgpresents.comhttp://www.my-t-mouse.comhttp://www.my-t-pen.comhttp://www.my-t-soft.comhttp://www.my-t-touch.comhttp://www.onscreen-keyboard.comhttp://www.build-a-board.comhttp://www.joystick-to-mouse.comhttp://www.themagnifier.us

For International Contacts, please see WebSite...


67

Part II. UsingMy-T-Touch

Description of howto operate and

configureMy-T-Touch.

Description of how to operate and configureMy-T-Touch.

Chapter 3 - My-T-Touch Panels containsgeneral operation information, along withspecific information about each ofMy-T-Touch’s panels.

Chapter 4 - My-T-Touch Menu outlines thevarious options accessible from theMy-T-Touch menu, and provides details onsizing, minimizing, saving, and closingMy-T-Touch.

Chapter 5 - My-T-Touch Setup details all ofthe configuration options and dialogs availableto configure and setup My-T-Touch.

Chapter 6 - My-T-Touch Logon Utilitiescovers the specific options available for usingthe logon utilities that enable using anon-screen keyboard when logging ontoWindows.

Chapter 3. My-T-TouchPanels

General OperationAll features and actions within My-T-Touchare performed by moving the cursor / pointerover the desired button and single clicking theselected button. My-T-Touch may berepositioned on the screen by clickinganywhere on the background (anywhere that isnot a button) of My-T-Touch and dragging it tothe new screen position.

My-T-Touch can also assign a secondarybutton (if supported by the hardware driver) tomove My-T-Touch. See My-T-Touch SetupHelp for more information on how to change

70

Chapter 3. My-T-Touch Panels

your Mouse Button Assignments.

Themes

Themes use different key images andbackgrounds to create a wide range of looks tothe My-T-Touch layouts. The available themesare based on the ThemeList, which listssub-folders that contain images and details on aparticular theme. You can change the currenttheme to the next available theme via theAdvanced Features menu, or (if in use), theTouch Panel. To modify, add, or get moredetailed information on Themes, refer to theInitialization File entries for Theme,ThemeList, and ThemesFolder.

Tool Bar Panel and KeysMy-T-Touch may be configured to operate in a

71


Supervisor or Operator Mode, which changesthe functionality of the Tool Bar. The Tool Barmay be covered or hidden under a CustomLogo. Consult My-T-Touch Setup, SpecialHandling and the Advanced User Informationfor Details.

The Tool Bar can also be closed, but this isintended as a developer / integrator function.From the Current Settings | Panels menu youmay individually select panels to open andclose. There is also a manual override,available in Panels. When this is enabled, a3-click (1-2-3) click combination will togglethe panel - if opened, it will be closed - ifclosed, it will be opened. The original designcreated the Tool Bar as the one panel that cannever be closed, and it is handled differentlythan the other selectable panels. Allowing it toclose creates certain usability issues, and incertain cases the Control Panel will be

72


modified to offer other options when the ToolBar is closed. If the Tool Bar is closed, resizingand certain other actions will force the ToolBar open.

The Tool Button opens and closes My-T-TouchControl Panel in the normal / SupervisorMode. In Operator Mode, the Tool Button doesnot function.

The Menu Button pops up the My-T-TouchMenu. It allows you quick access to some of

73


the frequently used options as well as theability to run My-T-Touch Help. You may alsosave your current configuration & screenposition from the My-T-Touch Menu . InOperator Mode, the Menu Button does notfunction.

The Minimize Button minimizes My-T-Touchto an icon or a button, based on your currentconfiguration.

Important Note: Disabling thefunctionality and/or changing theappearance of the Tool Bar is possible(often used when in the Operator Mode).The Operator Mode is an AdvancedFunction. Consult My-T-Touch Setup,Special Handling and the Advanced UserInformation for Details.

74


Control Panel and Keys

The Control panel allows you to open andclose all My-T-Touch panels. Click on eachkey to perform the toggle action. Blue(highlighted) letters indicate an open panel,black letters indicate a closed panel.

Click on the Tool Button to activate the ControlPanel. To prevent the Operator from accessingthis panel, see My-T-Touch Setup, Special

75


Handling and the Advanced User Notes forDetails.

Keys & Functions

Kybd: opens and closes the alpha keyboardpanelEdit: opens and closes the edit panelNum: opens and closes the numeric panelMag: opens and closes the Magnifier panelSzUp: steps up the size of My-T-Touchcurrently displayed If the Tool Bar is closed,this button will change to become Tool. If Toolis clicked on, the Tool Bar will open.SzDn: steps down the size of My-T-Touchcurrently displayed If the Tool Bar is closed,this button will change to become Hide. IfHide is clicked on, the Control Panel will hide.If the Control Panel is the only button panelopened, this button will change to becomeSwap. If Swap is clicked on, the Tool Bar willopen, and the Control panel will close.

76


Help: opens and closes the Quick Help panelInfo: opens and closes the System InformationpanelWin: opens and closes the Windows ControlspanelMacro: opens and closes the Macro panelCalc: opens and closes the CalculatorExit: exits My-T-Touch and Closes theMy-T-Touch Window

Keyboard Panels and Keys

When you click any of the keys on theKeyboard (Alpha) Panel, Edit Panel, and

77


Numeric Panel, they will respond exactly likethe corresponding keystroke on a physicalkeyboard. In order to type with My-T-Touch,another window must be the ActiveApplication and have the input focus. Windowstypically indicate where typed characters willbe displayed by the Caret, or text cursor. Thisusually is displayed as a flashing bar, althoughother shapes may be used.

To use combination keys i.e. Shift, Alt, or Ctrljust click on that key. Your cursor will changeand My-T-Touch will display which key iscurrently locked. For example, if you haveclicked on the Alt key, the cursor will have theword Alt visible. The lock will be releasedafter you click on a normal key, i.e. A-Z keys.You may carry more than one combination keyat a time.

On some international layouts, the right-mostAlt key is treated as the "AltGr" key. When

78


pressed, this key acts as if both the Ctrl key andthe Alt key have been pressed, and the cursorwill indicate this combination state. Thisadditional state (e.g. Ctrl & Alt keys bothpressed) allows access to additional letters andkeys.

There are numerous layouts available for thekeyboard panel, accessible throughMy-T-Touch Setup, Keyboards - SeeMy-T-Touch Setup Help for information onavailable panels and how to change the currentkeyboard layout.

You may also select from some pre-defined(included) Build-A-Board custom layouts. Tocreate your own layouts, you will need IMG’sBuild-A-Board.

Keys may be programmed with commands orMacros. See Key Options in Setup andreference the My-T-Touch Developer’s Kit formore information.

79


Windows Control Panels andKeys

Click on each button to perform the actiondescribed. The keystroke equivalent is shownin the [brackets]. Page 1 - Windows ControlsDesktop Panel

MENU Opens the control (system) menu ofthe active window. [Alt][Space]

80


Prop Properties / Opens the Context Menu (ifavailable) [Shift][F10]

NEXT Go to next window and restore windowsize. [Alt][Tab]

Yes Yes answer. [Alt][Y]

No No answer. [Alt][N]

Tile Tile the windows/icons. [Shift][F4]

FIND Switches through all open windows.[Alt][Esc]

RSTR Restore the window to its former size.[Alt][Space][R]

CLOSE Close the active window. [Alt][F4]

MIN Minimize the active window (to an icon).[Alt][Space][N]

MAX Maximize the active window (fullscreen). [Alt][Space][X]

Casc Cascade the windows/icons. [Shift][F5]81


Find Find the next child window. [Ctrl][Tab]

Enter Enter Key. [ENTER]

Close Close the active child window of anactive window. [Ctrl][F4]

Rstr Restore the child window to its formersize. [Alt][Space][R]

Max Maximize the child window.[Alt][Space][X]

Pg2 Move to Page 2 of the Windows Controls.

Page 2 - Windows Controls Application Panel

UNDO Undo last command. [Alt-BkSp]

CUT Cut highlighted object to clipboard.[Shft-Del][Ctrl-X]

COPY Copies highlighted object to clipboard.[Ctrl-Ins][Ctrl-C]

PASTE Pastes object from clipboard to activewindow. [Shft-Ins][Ctrl-V]

82


PPST Pastes object from clipboard to previouswindow.

PPSTR Pastes object from clipboard toprevious window and returns.

FIND Switches through all open windows.[Alt-Esc]

PREV Goes to previous active window (ifavailable).

CLOSE closes active window. [Alt-F4]

MIN minimizes active window (to an icon).[Alt][Space][N]

MAX maximizes active window (full screen).[Alt][Space][X]

RSTR Restore the window to its former size.[Alt][Space][R]

Find find the next child window. [Ctrl-Tab]

Enter Enter Key. [Enter]

83


Close Close the active child window of anactive window. [Ctrl][F4]

Rstr Restore the child window to its formersize. [Alt][Space][R]

Max maximize the child window.[Alt][Space][X]

Pg1 return to page 1.

In order to use the PPST and PPSTRfunctions, you must do the following:

1. These functions work best when you havetwo windows on your desktop.

2. Use the FIND button to select the secondwindow.

3. Verify that both windows are in sequenceby using the PREV key.

4. If both windows switch back and forth,then this feature is available.

84


5. Highlight some text in Window1 and pressCOPY or CUT.

6. Use PPST to paste to Window2.

7. Use PPSTR to past to Window2 and returnto Window1.

8. This feature will continue to be available,until either Window is closed or anotherwindow receives the input focus.

85


Macro Panels and Keys

The purpose of the Macro Panel is to give youthe capability of defining your own buttons tolaunch programs, open other Macro Panels, orcreate keystroke combinations.

In My-T-Touch, a Macro is a sequence ofkeystrokes or actions tied to a button. TheMacro is initiated by selecting the button.

The main Macro Panel provided has options

86


preprogrammed to show you the vastcapabilities of this panel. For more informationsee the User’s Guide, or see My-T-Touch SetupHelp (How to create Macros).

Several Example Macro Panels have also beenprovided. Macro Panels have the ability toAuto-Open when the appropriate applicationbecomes the active window. The Auto-Openfeature will only operate if the Macro Panel isopen on My-T-Touch, and the My-T-Touchwindow is not minimized.

87


Calculator Panel

The calculator is a standard four functioncalculator. To operate simply press the desirednumber, press an operation key, press the nextnumber, and press an operation key or the total(=) key. You may then send the displayednumber to the active window by pressing theSD (Send) button. While there is a numberstored in memory, the calculator’s displaywindow frame will change color to indicate

88


that memory has a value stored.

Calculator Tape

The Tape key will allow you to run a history ofany calculations, just as on paper tape and thenyou may save it as a file, print it, or import it toanother document. If you want to use the tape,it must be activated BEFORE any operationsare performed. Click on the Tape button toactivate. You may also click on the calculatordisplay window to activate & deactivate thecalculator tape. The calculator tape willautomatically close if you close the CalculatorPanel on My-T-Touch. If necessary, you will beasked if you wish to save any informationrecorded in the Tape.

The Calculator Tape window has a drop-downFile Menu which has options to save the Tapeas file, print, or open a previously saved tape.The drop-down Edit menu has the standard editfunctions - Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste.

89


Quick Help Panel

The Quick Help panel appears above thecurrently displayed panels and describes eachkey as it is passed over with the cursor. Youmay open or close the Quick Help panel fromthe My-T-Touch Menu or from the Help buttonon the My-T-Touch Control Panel .

To assign the Quick Help capability to yourmacros, see How to create Macros inMy-T-Touch Setup Help.

System Information Panel

The information panel appears below the

90


currently displayed panels and shows date,time, system resources, etc. as chosen fordisplay in My-T-Touch Setup. You mayrearrange the order of the information shownby clicking on any item. This will move thatitem to first place on the left in the informationpanel. If you have more than one hard-drive ora CD-ROM drive, or if you are operating on aNetwork , use the up-and-down arrows todisplay the current free space of each drive.

Time & Date display depend on Internationaldisplay settings set by the Windows ControlPanel.

91


Magnifier Panel

The Magnifier will display a magnified view ofthe area where your Cursor (Pointer) iscurrently over. The Magnifier Panel magnifiesanywhere on the screen and can magnifybetween 1x through 10x (2x default). This isvery helpful when My-T-Touch is open as asmall board. You still will be able to select allkeys by looking at the magnifier. This is also

92


an aid to the visually impaired. To select adifferent magnification, slide the cursor overthe Magnifier panel and click - a menu with 1xto 10x selections will appear - select thedesired magnification with the menu.

If you want to display the Cursor inside theMagnifier, run My-T-Touch Setup and click on"Configuration" | click on "Panels" | check"Display Cursor" On or Off, and click OK.Note that this is a reference cursor, not theactual cursor visible on the screen.

93


Touch Panel

94


Touch Panel

The Touch Panel can be enabled / disabled viathe My-T-Touch menu. It is primarily meantfor multi-touch capable devices runningWindows Vista or later. It will appear on theright-hand side of My-T-Touch, unless there isnot enough room to display the full touchpanel, and there is room on the left-hand side.The logic determining Touch Panel locationincluded the entire virtual space (for multiplemonitors). When enabled, there are 4 areas thatprovide different features:

Change Theme

The multi-color (rainbow) area surrounding theblank key can be touched to change the currenttheme (based on the ThemeList and availablethemes).

Multi-Touch

Touch the Multi-Touch area to enable95


Multi-touch (when enabled, it will be indicatedwith lighter colored hand display). UsingMulti-Touch allows you to press multiple keysat the same time, especially useful for Shift orCtrl functions (or using both hands).

Gestures

Touch the Gestures area to enable Gestures(when enabled, it will be indicated with lightercolored hand display). Using Gestures enablesthe following options:

• Pinch/Zoom - Bringing 2 fingers together ina pinch, will result in a size-down event, andexpanding 2 fingers will result in a size-upevent

• Rotate - 2 fingers, one set, the other rotatesaround will result in a Change Theme event

• Pan (press and move) - this will slide theMy-T-Touch window, or operate like a

96


standard click & move if you continuepressing

• Two-Finger-Tap or Press-and-Tap - this willresult in a right-click event (default option isto open the menu, but the right-click eventaction configurable via My-T-Touch Setup |Mouse Buttons)

Flicks

When in the normal mode (no Multi-Touch orGestures), flick events can be sensed andprocessed. The standard setting will usevertical or horizontal flicks to moveMy-T-Touch to the edge of the screen, or adiagonal flick will result in a minimize event.

Clear / Dismiss / Recall

The large Green touch area will clear (turn off)the current touch mode (Multi-Touch orGestures) and operate in the normal mode(Note: Flicks are supported in normal mode). If

97


the current mode is currently "normal" (noMulti-Touch or Gestures), then a touch willmove My-T-Touch off-screen. Whenoff-screen, a touch will bring My-T-Touchback onscreen.

Technical Notes on the Touch Panel:For proper Touch Panel integration withthe system, a system requires WindowsVista or later, a multi-touch display, andrequires the existence of theMultiTouchDLL.DLL in the installationfolder. (The MultiTouchDLL.DLL integratesvarious features and can be modified viathe source code in the IMG Developer’sKit).

98

Chapter 4. My-T-TouchMenu

The My-T-Touch Menu will give you quickaccess to the most used functions ofMy-T-Touch and Windows System Menufunctions. The default operation of the rightmouse button (i.e. second button) will openthis menu when it is clicked over theMy-T-Touch window.

My-T-Touch MenuSize

Clicking on Size will open a pop-up menu. Youmay select Size Up or Size Down to go up orgo down a single size. Here you can select any

99

Chapter 4. My-T-Touch Menu

of the 12 smaller sizes of My-T-Touch. Thecurrent size is indicated with a check-mark.

When larger than Size 12, you may only SizeUp or Size Down.

The Screen-Edge Scroll option will have acheck mark when Enabled. When Enabled anda portion of the My-T-Touch window isoff-screen, My-T-Touch will scroll backon-screen when the cursor (pointer) is held atthe extreme edge of the screen. This featuremay be useful for larger sizes. NOTE: Certainpointing devices may not react desirably whenthis feature is Enabled - select the Screen-EdgeScroll to clear the check mark and Disable thisfeature.

Minimize to Icon

Minimize to Button

The check-mark indicates the way My-T-Touchwill be minimized, when you click on the

100


Minimize Button. Select which wayMy-T-Touch will look when minimized. Notethat the Icon on Taskbar can only be selectedvia My-T-Touch Setup. If currently at Buttonand Minimize to Icon is selected, the Iconoption will be used. By clicking on eitherselection, My-T-Touch will be minimizedimmediately.

My-T-Touch Quick Help

Clicking on My-T-Touch Quick Help will openand close the Quick Help panel. Thecheck-mark will indicate its current status.

My-T-Touch Help!

Clicking on My-T-Touch Help will openMy-T-Touch Help (information in this guide).

My-T-Touch Tutorial

Clicking on My-T-Touch Tutorial will beginthe My-T-Touch Tutorial.

101


My-T-Touch Setup

Clicking on My-T-Touch Setup will openMy-T-Touch Setup Window.

Current Settings

Note: Saving BOTH the Settings andPosition is required for returning to thecurrent layout when closing & restartingMy-T-Touch. Refer to the Developer’s Kitnotes for other configuration options,saving, restoring, etc. Settings refers tothe current panels shown, and the currentsize (the current, visible layout). Clickingon Current Settings will open a pop-upmenu. Here you can select Save CurrentSettings, or Restore Settings.

Save Current Settings: This will saveMy-T-Touch as it appears. My-T-Touch will

102


always open with this saved configuration.Restore Settings: If you have changedMy-T-Touch and want to return to the savedconfiguration, select Restore Settings.Panels: Clicking on Panels will open apop-up menu. This allows you to open andclose individual panels. When the panel isalready opened, a check mark will be next tothe Panel. If the panel is opened, and you selectthe panel from the menu, it will close thepanel. If you select a closed panel from themenu, it will open the panel. From this menu,you may not close a panel if there is only onepanel opened.

Position

Clicking on Position will open a pop-up menu.Here you can select Save Position, or RestorePosition.

Save Position: This will save My-T-Touch’s

103


current screen position.Restore Position: If you have movedMy-T-Touch and want to return to the savedposition, select Restore Position.Set Position: Clicking on Set Position willopen a pop-up menu. From this menu you mayselect a screen position for My-T-Touch fromthe options available.

Close

Clicking on Close will close My-T-Touch.

Advanced Features

Selecting Advanced Features will open apop-up menu. Here you can access somespecial features.

Transparency

Clicking on Transparency... will open aTransparency control window, allowing you toEnable or Disable this feature. When Enabled,

104


you can set the current Transparency level bysliding the control - to the left is moretransparent, to the right is less transparent (oropaque). The current Transparency level isused if My-T-Touch is closed and thenre-opened.

Transparency Notes: WhenTransparency is Enabled, the windowinterface to Windows changes (LayeredWindows), and the following are knownissues:

• The Magnifier panel can now magnifyimages under the My-T-Touch windowitself, providing a more intuitiveoperation.

• When operating with CrossScanner,CrossScanner’s IconWindow will bedisplayed below My-T-Touch. It isstrongly recommended that

105


Transparency not be enabled if usingCrossScanner.

Manual Tool Bar Control

Clicking on Manual Tool Bar Control willEnable or Disable this capability - whenchecked, you can click 3 times on a blank(non-key) area or border, and toggle the Toolbar Panel - if open, it will close, and if closed itwill open. For further info, see notes inMy-T-Touch Setup | Panels.

Tablet PC Input Panel

Note: Windows XP Tablet PC VersionsOnly - this interface is not available inWindows Vista / 7.

106


When operating on the Tablet PC, My-T-Touchcan replace the Tablet PC Input Panel. Clickingon Tablet PC Input Panel will Enable orDisable this capability. When enabled, clickingon the "Tablet PC Input Panel" on the task barwill toggle the visibility of My-T-Touch. Whenenabled, the My-T-Touch Tablet PC Interfacewill be running, and will be in the StartUpgroup.

Note: You must be an Administrator tofully disable the My-T-Touch Tablet PCInterface (or have sufficient rights toremove the All Users | StartUp groupshortcut). When Enabled, Exit or Closefrom the Menu will only hide My-T-Touchand My-T-Touch will not exit with theDeveloper’s Kit CloseMTS. To fully closeMy-T-Touch, first disable the Tablet PCInput Panel option on the AdvancedFeatures Menu, then select Close from theMy-T-Touch menu. For additional

107


information, refer to the PanelWatch inAdvanced User Notes.

Touch Panel

Clicking on the Touch Panel menu option willEnable or Disable the Touch Panel. The TouchPanel allows options to toggle touch modes(Multi-Touch / Gestures / Flicks), changethemes, and control the visibility ofMy-T-Touch.

Change Theme

Clicking on the Change Theme menu optiontriggers a theme change event, which willupdate the current theme to the next availabletheme (based on the ThemeList).

108

Chapter 5. My-T-TouchSetup

My-T-Touch Setup -Overview

My-T-Touch Setup provides an easy interface

109

Chapter 5. My-T-Touch Setup

to change options, settings, and theconfiguration for My-T-Touch.

Advanced Notes: The filesKEYBOARD.KBF and MYTTOUCH.INIcontain all of the configuration informationfor My-T-Touch. There can also beKeyboard Macro files for customizedMacro panels (e.g. MAC?????.KMF) andWordList files. All of these files are storedin a location determined by the ConfigPathentry in the MYTTOUCH.INI file. (Refer tothe ConfigPath entry in the Initialization filefor additional information.) This locationdetermines if the files are per user orshared, and the required permissions fornormal operation. By default, these filesare personalized for each user, and thespecific location can be referenced fromthe File menu in My-T-Touch Setup. Youmay also access the Windows ControlPanel from the File menu.

110


In the File menu, you can access WindowsControl Panel, view the current folder locationof the configuration files, Import/Export settingfiles, and Exit.

• Run Control Panel - This opens theWindows Control Panel to access systemlevel properties like Appearance, andavailable Keyboard Layouts. For most users,the Windows Control Panel not required - itis provided here as a convenience.

• Show Config File Location - This displaysthe actual path to the My-T-Touchconfiguration files for the current user. Referto the ConfigPath entry in the Initializationfile for additional information.

• Export Current User Configuration -When selected, and the operation confirmed,

111


this will save and compress the currentuser’s configuration files and place aMy-T-Touch_Settings.zip file on theDesktop. This file can be saved as a backup,or moved to another system to transfer theconfiguration from one system to another. Ifmultiple exports are done, each file namewill change by adding a "+" symbol to theexport file name.

• Import Configuration - This will open aFile Selection window to select a"???_Settings.zip". If selected, and theoperation confirmed, the current user’sexisting settings will be overwritten and bereplaced with the settings contained withinthe selected file. For best results, use settingsfiles from the same product & version, andperform this operation from My-T-TouchSetup while My-T-Touch is closed

• Exit - this will Close and Exit My-T-Touch112


Setup.

In the Options menu, each major Setup sectioncan be accessed, along with Save options whenrunning My-T-Touch.

When My-T-Touch is running and My-T-TouchSetup is opened, the setting Save Settings onExit is checked "On" by default. Thissynchronizes My-T-Touch with the changesmade in Setup and My-T-Touch. If this optionis checked "Off" and My-T-Touch is runningwhile changing settings, the settings will besaved as normal upon an "OK", but thesechanges will not be reflected in My-T-Touchuntil it is restarted.

• Save After Move - the current settings andposition are saved after the completion of amove. This can be useful to always preservethe current position while operatingMy-T-Touch.

113


• Save After Change - this saves the settingsand position after a size or panel change.This can be helpful in preserving the currentconfiguration.

• Save At Close - the configuration andposition will be saved when My-T-Touch isclosed. This ensures that My-T-Touch willalways open in the last used configuration.

• Save At End Session - if Windows isshut-down or the user logs off, the currentsettings and position will be saved.

Access to Help and the Help Index (i.e. accessto this guide) are available from the HelpMenu.

You may also Check for Updates... from theHelp Menu in My-T-Touch Setup.

About My-T-Touch... in the Help Menuprovides version and release information aboutMy-T-Touch.

114


Help

Click on the Help Button.

Help brings up the My-T-Touch Help, whichoffers various views into this guide. Helpincludes help for My-T-Touch, My-T-TouchSetup, My-T-Touch Logon Utilities, andAdvanced Notes. Click the Help Button orclick Help on the caption bar menu to accessthe on-line help screens for My-T-Touch Setup.Each dialog box in My-T-Touch Setup also hascontext sensitive Help available by selectingthe Help button.

115


Change My-T-TouchConfiguration

Click on the Configuration Button.

116


Within Configuration, you will be able to setconditions that influence how My-T-Touch willappear and behave on screen.

Minimize My-T-Touch to...

You can select how My-T-Touch will act whenit is minimized.

Title Bar Button - In order to minimizeMy-T-Touch to a Title Bar Button, do thefollowing steps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button with the title "Title BarButton".

2. Press the OK Button.

My-T-Touch now will minimize to a button,which is always attached to the activeapplication’s title bar (top caption bar). Torestore the window back to full size, click onthe button once.

117


Note: There are numerous customerrequested button size & positioningoptions - see detailed information inInitialization File Documentation.

TaskBar Button - In order to minimizeMy-T-Touch to a Taskbar Button, do thefollowing steps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button with the title "TaskbarButton".


My-T-Touch now will minimize to a button onthe Taskbar. To restore the window back to fullsize, click on the button on the WindowsTaskbar, or right-click and select restore ormaximize.

118


Tray Icon - In order to minimize My-T-Touchto an icon in the System Tray, do the followingsteps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button with the title "Tray Icon".


My-T-Touch now will minimize to an icon inthe System Tray (in the area with the clock &volume control). To restore the window back tofull size, click on the small icon in the task bar,or right-click and select restore.

Window - In order to minimize My-T-Touch toan floating Window, do the following steps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button with the title "a Window".


119


My-T-Touch now will minimize to a smallfloating window. To restore the window back tofull size, click on the window. The minimizedfloating window can be resized and positionedas desired - when My-T-Touch is minimized,the last position and size of the minimizedfloating window will be used.

Operation Options

This will open an Operation Options dialogallowing you to set your preferences whileusing My-T-Touch. These include Reacting toDialogs and other Windows, Typematicoperation, Keystroke / Click option, VirtualPointer, Action Button Move, Lower Casedisplay, Track Pointing Device Input, and KeyBorder.

Key Options

This opens the Key Options dialog where youcan select Keys and Key combos (Ctrl, Shift,

120


Alt) that may be Enabled or Disabled.Additionally, a Key or Key Combo can launchan executable. In conjunction with theMy-T-Touch Developers Kit, this capabilitycan be used to create new operational features,such as Minimize after the Enter key is pressed.

Special Options

This opens the Special Options dialog boxwhere Special handling features for Advancedusers, developers, and integrators can be found.Includes the Supervisor/Operator modeoptions, and Custom Logo Feature, along withthe ability to react to other windows in thesystem as they become active (SpecialHandling), including the ability to launch aseparate executable.

The six buttons in the middle of the dialog boxoffer additional configuration options forMy-T-Touch.

121


Panels Select the panels which My-T-Touchdisplays.

Motion Select the motion of your panels.

Size Select the size of My-T-Touch.

Info Select the information displayed in theInformation panel.

Colors Select the colors for each panel.

Fonts Select different character display forMy-T-Touch.

Display Options

Display 3D Keys - Check this option On toenable the display of the shaded,three-dimensional look keys. For resolutions of256 colors or less, it is recommended that thisoption be set Off. My-T-Touch checks thecurrent display capabilities when started, andmay override this option. Note that the 3D keysare only displayed for sizes 8 or higher (the

122


smaller sizes do not have enough displayedpixels to effectively render the 3-D look).

Show & Hide Keys

This opens My-T-Touch in a special mode thatallows keys on the main keyboard panel to behidden. This is useful for controlledapplications where certain keys or keycombinations need to be unavailable - forexample, hiding the Alt key makes Alt-F4impossible. To hide a key, click on the key -My-T-Touch will be repainted without the keyjust selected. To re-display a hidden key, clickon the space where the key normally wouldappear, and the key will be shown again. ToSave the current setting, click on OK . SelectCANCEL to ignore any changes. Select Resetto Show All Keys on My-T-Touch.

My-T-Touch Logon Utilities

In order to logon onto Windows & obtain

123


access to Network resources, the appropriatelogon configuration is required withinWindows. There are various options availablein My-T-Touch to display & interact with thelogon requirements. This opens the appropriateconfiguration options for the Windowsplatform running. See My-T-Touch LogonUtilities for more information.

Note: In general, when you make changeswithin My-T-Touch Setup, the changes areimmediate and reflected by My-T-Touch.However, some display optioncombinations may require a restart ofMy-T-Touch for proper display. The logonoptions typically require a restart ofWindows.

My-T-Touch Panel Selection124


Dialog Box

My-T-Touch lets you select which panels areopen every time you start My-T-Touch.

If you want ALL panels to be open every timeyou run My-T-Touch, click on the "All Panels"Check-Button.

To allow manual control of opening & closingthe Tool Bar, place a check-mark in the ToolbarManual Control. When enabled, a 3-click(1-2-3) click on a non-button (e.g. border or

125


other non-key area) will toggle the Tool Bar toopen if closed, and to close if opened.

You can click on-and-off each individual panel.

The panels with a check-mark will be openeach time you start My-T-Touch.

To Display the cursor within the Magnifier,place a check-mark in the Display CursorCheck-Button.

Press the OK Button.

If you do not want to save your changes, pressthe CANCEL button.

126


Operation Options

IMPORTANT NOTE: There are varioussettings here to change how My-T-Touchoperates. If you are having problemstyping, see Interface Settings.

React to Dialogs and other Windows(Window Contention)

127


This is a global setting for My-T-Touch thatwill change the internal operation of thesoftware. If set On, My-T-Touch will move offof dialogs, and react to other Windows basedon Special and Macro Panel settings. If set Off,this sensing & reacting to other windows in thesystem will be disabled. For certain types ofuse, having My-T-Touch remain in a particularscreen location at all times and not affectingother windows in the system is preferred.

IMPORTANT NOTE: My-T-Touch’sautomatic sensing for Special & MacroPanel options will NOT operate if this is setOff.

Enable Typematic Operation

The automatic typing of a character while aparticular key is pressed down for a period of

128


time requires that Enable Typematic Operationbe set On. If set Off, this automatic typingoperation is disabled. Specific settings forTypematic operation can be found in theMYTTOUCH.INI initialization file. SeeAdvanced User Information for more details.

No Keystroke until Down and Up ClickCompleted

My-T-Touch reacts like a physical keyboard,and a Click then Drag motion off of aparticular key results in the down andsubsequent release of that key, resulting in akeystroke being generated. To disable thisdefault action, set the option On. Setting thisoption On is preferred by users who do nothave precise control over the positioning of themouse pointer while a click occurs. When setOn, Typematic Operation is automatically setOff to disable multiple keystrokes of the samekey. This the forces the pointing device to

129


complete the Down & Up Click to generate thekeystroke initially selected by the Down click.

Virtual Pointer in Use

This setting should be set On if a the deviceused to move the mouse cursor (pointer) is nota standard mouse, or trackball. Any hardwaredevice that interacts via a "device driver" withWindows should not be considered a VirtualPointer (unless the implementation does notfully emulate a standard mouse [which is morecommon than otherwise]). Various AssistiveTechnology devices such as cameras or lasersthat track the eye, other biometric sensors, orother software based translation interfaces(such as the MouseKeys in Microsoft’sAccessibilities options) when used should havethe Virtual Pointer setting On. This featureforces My-T-Touch to operate slightlydifferently for "Clicks" (button down, buttonup), and during moving the My-T-Touch

130


window.

Alternate Virtual Interface

This setting should be set on ONLY when thereare typing difficulties AND the pointing devicedoes not activate the down/up display ofMy-T-Touch buttons. This setting may berequired for software interfaces, and othernon-physical approaches to operating themouse cursor and generating clicks. Olderversions of "Joystick-To-Mouse" will requirethis to be set On.

Allow Action Button Move

The setting is default On, and it allows theAction button (as set in My-T-Touch Setup,Mouse Buttons, Action button) to move theMy-T-Touch window by clicking on the frameor any unused area (Click, drag, then release).If the mouse cursor is not always trackedaccurately, it is recommended that this be set to

131


Off to prevent accidental moves. This may alsobe set off to prevent the operator from movingthe My-T-Touch window (note that the secondand/or third button must be configured properlyto ensure the move option is unavailable).

Note: This option will be automaticallydisabled if the Key Border is a non-0value. If you want this option enabled, besure to check the Key Border setting.

Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 (This setting doesnot apply, and is disabled)

Track Pointing Device Input at all times

This setting is default Off, unless Setup sensesa known driver or interface that requires thissetting On. If there are any focus problems (i.e.typing [clicking] on My-T-Touch does not type[send keystrokes] into the currently active

132


window), then this setting should be set On tosee if it resolves this problem. In general, thissetting should be Off if at all possible. SeeAdvanced User Notes for more information onthis setting and how it affects My-T-Touchoperation.

Use Upper Case Characters Always(Keyboard Panel)

By default, lower case characters are displayedon the Keyboard (Alpha) panel, unless the Shiftor Caps lock is engaged. Check this option Onto force Upper Case display at all times.

Key Border (# of pixels inside key edgeignored as key press)

This setting is used to reduce the area of eachkey that can register a press. For maximumeffect, the default setting is no border area. Asthe Key Border values increase, the pixelsinside each edge (top, left, bottom, right) are

133


removed from the area of the key that will reactto a click. Because of the differing sizes of thepanels and keys, this setting may affect certainsize ranges differently. It is recommended thatthe particular size for usage be selected first,and then the desired Key Border be set tomatch the current size.

Note: My-T-Touch automatically sets the"Allow Action Button Move" to Off whenthere is a border in use (greater than 0).This prevents the undesirable move whenclicks & releases are not accurate due toeither software driver or operatingconditions.

Interface SettingsThese are the steps that should be tried if you

134


are having difficulties typing with My-T-Touch.

1) The following settings are the preferredoptions:

Virtual Pointer in Use = On

Alternate Virtual Interface = Off

Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =Off

2) If you are working with a Touchscreen or aPen, and when tapping on My-T-Touch, youobserve the buttons being pressed, but theactive application (where you are trying to typeinto) becomes inactive, try setting TrackPointing Device Input at All Times to On.


Alternate Virtual Interface = Off

Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =On

135


3) If you are working with a virtual, assistive,or another non-hardware pointing device, andwhen clicking on My-T-Touch, you do notobserve the buttons being pressed, set theAlternate Virtual Interface to On


Alternate Virtual Interface = On

Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =Off

Other Notes

The Virtual Pointer in Use should ONLY be setOff if you are using a physical mouse, or adevice that interfaces like a physical mouse.The device MUST support theGetAsyncKeyState for the VK_LBUTTON &VK_RBUTTON. In general, there is nonegative aspect to having this setting On evenif you are using a physical mouse.

136


The Alternate Virtual Interface overrides theTrack Pointing Device Input at All Times, sothere is never a case where they BOTH wouldbe On.

If you are still having difficulties withMy-T-Touch after trying the above, check thedevice settings to see if there are other optionsavailable - it is possible it is operating in amode that is not compatible with otherWindows programs. You may also wish to testwith a physical mouse to see if the pointingdevice is truly emulating a mouse pointer.

If you continue to have difficulties, pleasecontact Technical Support.

137


Key Options

Key Options offers customization capabilitiesfor keys on the main Alpha Keyboard Paneland the Edit panel. Keys may be disabled,assigned to other functions, and can bere-mapped using the Launch Key EXE inconjunction with the Developer’s Kit (e.g. theEsc key could be re-mapped to send Alt-F4).

Select Key

This Drop-Down list allows you to select the

138


specific key you wish to work with. Thenumber in parentheses is the internal ID usedby My-T-Touch for the key’s position. Refer tothe Build-A-Macro Notes for more details onthese internal IDs.

Select Key Modifier (Key with...)

This Drop-Down list allows you to select aspecific key combination (i.e. Ctrl-Alt-Delete)for the currently selected Key. All combinationoptions are available. Note that with the propersetting, you can disable Ctrl-F1, but not F1, orjust disable Alt-F4, or Shift-Esc. Due to thecomplexity of available applications, eachpossible option for each key is given. See theKey Display (below) which is a quick visualaid to see if a particular key has any enhancedsettings.

Key Display

This is a visual aid only. When it is 0 (zero),

139


there are no enhanced key settings in use. Allkeys are Enabled, and there is no Launchsetting on. Any non-zero display means that atleast one enhanced key setting is selected forthe currently selected Key.

Clear

This button will remove all enhanced settingsfor the currently selected key. All keystrokeswill be Enabled, and any Launch settings willbe removed (No Additional Action will beselected to every possible keystroke). This willnot remove the Key EXE entry, but this isdisabled since all Launch settings will becleared.

Enable Keystroke(s) / Disable Keystroke(s)

This defines the state of the particular key andits current modifier (Ctrl, Shift, Alt). IfEnabled, then My-T-Touch will generate &send the keystroke. If Disabled, then the

140


keystroke(s) will be removed and no action byMy-T-Touch will occur when the particularkeystroke(s) is/are initiated by the user. Notethat this action is independent of the LaunchKey EXE capability.

No Additional Action / Launch Key EXE

In general, the No Additional Action for anykeystroke is the typical setting. Due tocustomer requests, we have added thecapability of also initiating other actions tied tospecific Keystrokes. By using the My-T-TouchDevelopers Kit, these (or any other developerselected action) can be tied to a particularkeystroke or combination. Some of theserequested capabilities are:

- Minimize to button upon Enter (type Enter,then minimize = Enter Key Enabled, LaunchMINMZMTS.EXE)

- Ctrl-Alt-Delete restarts system

141


(Ctrl-Alt-Delete Launches NTRSTART.EXE)

- Alt-F4 cannot close window (Alt-F4Disabled)

- Make F1 run special Application Helpprogram tied to a different key (F1 KeyDisabled, Launch SDSTRMTS.EXE withappropriate alternate keystroke used)

This adds a great deal of flexibility to thegeneral keyboard (similar to the capabilities ofthe Macro panels), but it also creates a greaterchance of confusion. These should only beused when implementing a system for only 1type of use. In general, these settings arepotentially more dangerous then helpful.Wondering why the keyboard disappearseverytime you press Enter is certainly not theend goal of productivity - so please beextremely careful when using these options,and document any changes for developers tocome and for your users!

142


Key EXE

This is an Executable file that will be run if the"Launch key EXE" option is selected for theparticular Key Combination. Note you may addcommand line options, but be sure to click onOK when you are through editing the selection.

Browse

This button will open a File Open BrowseDialog that will let you explore your system toselect an executable. Because of backwardcompatibility, only short path & file names areused.

It is strongly recommended that onlyDeveloper Kit EXEs be used.

My-T-Touch Special

143


Handling Dialog Box

Important Note: This dialog box containsadvanced user options. In general, mostusers should ignore these settings.

Select Special Options:

Some Windows applications do not conform topre-defined Windows standards, or require

144


special handling to work along withMy-T-Touch. Some known applications areincluded in the Pull-down box box on the left.On the right, click on a Radio-Button to selectthe action each application should perform towork along My-T-Touch. You may add newApplications by typing the name in the top boxon the left. This will add the Application Nameto the list. Once selected, choose one of theoptions on the right to indicate howMy-T-Touch should react when the selectedApplication becomes active. To delete an entry,highlight the entire selection, press the Deletekey to remove the text, and then press Enter toremove the entry from the list.

Minimize to Button

When My-T-Touch overlaps the Application, a"Goto Button" command will minimizeMy-T-Touch to a Button.

Minimize to Icon145


When My-T-Touch overlaps the Application a"Goto Icon" command will minimizeMy-T-Touch to an Icon.

Move Off Application

This will move My-T-Touch below theApplication Window. Note that based onwindow size and My-T-Touch size, areas maybe moved off screen.

Hide

This option currently matches the Minimize toIcon.

Resize

This will move My-T-Touch off the window,and resize the Application so that it occupiesthe rest of the screen area above My-T-Touch.

Ignore

This option is meant for the user who maywant different actions based on changing

146


circumstances, and may not want special actionduring a period of time.

Run EXE

The ability to Run an Executable file adds greatflexibility, and should be used in conjunctionwith the My-T-Touch Developers Kit. Theexecutable file is run once until anotherexecutable is launched via My-T-Touch(typically when some other window becomesactive that is in the Special Handling list).Primarily this is meant to be used to position orreconfigure My-T-Touch as different windowsbecome active (different web pages, differentapplications, etc.). My-T-Touch only checksthe Active window when it is open normally(NOT as an Icon or Button). Also, the React toDialog and other Windows in OperationOptions can override these settings.

Browse

147


This button will open a File Open BrowseDialog that will let you explore your system toselect an executable. For maximumcompatibility, only short path & file names areused. When the Run EXE is updated, it is alsosaved for the currently selected "ApplicationWindow Text". If you wish to modify the entry(e.g. add command line options), you mustthen click on OK to save these changes.

Notes on Application Window Text &Advanced Notes

The entire Caption bar (or entire WindowName) is searched for a match, starting in theorder of the Special List. Any part of thewindow name will match, therefore beingspecific is important. This substring match cancause problems, especially if the Window Textis common, e.g. "Word" will match WordPad,Microsoft Word, WordPerfect, etc. Becauseeach entry is checked regularly by

148


My-T-Touch, it can affect system operation asthe list grows. This list should be usedsparingly with extreme care, and only whenusing the Developers Kit within a separateApplication is not an option.

Edit My-T-Touch Initialization file:

Pushing this button will allow you to directlyedit the contents of the My-T-Touchinitialization file. Caution: Editing the .INI filecan cause My-T-Touch to operate incorrectly!Know what you are editing. Refer to theMy-T-Touch User’s Guide section on theInitialization File for complete coverage of thisoption.

Return to Installation defaults:

If you would like to return all options to theoriginal defaults, press this button. This willreplace the current initialization file(MYTTOUCH.INI) and the configuration file

149


(KEYBOARD.KBF) with the files from thetime of original installation. EVERYTHINGwill be reset to the configuration at that time(i.e. the time immediately after installation).

Enable Operator Security

To Enable Operator Security, Check this optionon. When Enabled, operation of My-T-Touch islimited in the following ways:

- The Operator may not operate the ToolButton to access the Control Panel

- The Operator may not open the My-T-TouchMenu

- The Operator may not open Build-A-Macrofrom the Main Macro Panel

- Access to My-T-Touch Setup is controlled viaa Password.

Note: The Default password is PASS. If youdecide to change the password, be sure to

150


record the new password for future reference!

General "Operator Security" Notes

Configure My-T-Touch so that the open panels,size, and colors are optimized for theapplication. In general, the Control Panelshould be closed, as the "Operator Mode" doesnot disable the actions of this panel. If theMacro Panel is open, make sure that all MacroPanel links, launched applications, etc. do notallow the user access to areas that need to besecure. Once My-T-Touch is configuredproperly, position the My-T-Touch Windowwhere desired, and the from the My-T-TouchMenu select Current Settings, Save CurrentSettings, and then select Position, Save CurrentPosition. Open My-T-Touch Setup, and SelectConfiguration, Special, Enable Operator ModeSecurity, then select OK. Close My-T-Touch &My-T-Touch Setup. When My-T-Touch is runin the future, it will appear as configured, and

151


the user will not be able to modify theconfiguration without the My-T-Touch SetupPassword. For more detailed coverage of otherbuilt-in features, consult the My-T-TouchUser’s Guide.

Disable Operator Minimize

This option will only work if Operator Securityis Enabled. If this option is On, then theminimize button on the Tool Bar will also bedisabled. Useful for specific applications, andin conjunction with the Custom Logo.

Use Custom Logo

If this option is On, My-T-Touch will load anoptional Custom Logo Bitmap (.BMP) filelocated in the installation directory. This is adeveloper / integrator option, and specificdetails are in the My-T-Touch User’s Guide,Advanced User Information and Logo notes inthe Developer’s Kit. Also see info on IMG’s

152


web site(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm).

My-T-Touch Panel MotionDialog Box

Panel Motion

Choose "Snap-Out Panel" and My-T-Touch’spanels will snap in & out. The newconfiguration will be displayed withoutintermediate displays.

153


Choose "Slide-Out Panel" and My-T-Touch’spanels will slide in & out. The newconfiguration will be displayed with a visualeffect of motion.



My-T-Touch Size Selections

154


Dialog Box

The size Dialog box allows you to select whichsize My-T-Touch will be displayed each timeyou start the program.

NOTE: This is not available if My-T-Touch isusing a size larger than 12 (infinite sizing). Forsizes larger than 12, you must use SzUp &SzDn from the My-T-Touch Control Panel.

Each of the 12 pictures show the approximatesize of My-T-Touch. In order to select a size

155


for My-T-Touch, do the following steps:

1. Click on the picture of the size you wantMy-T-Touch to be.



NOTE:

You can change My-T-Touch’s size alsodirectly from the My-T-Touch Control Panel orselect a new size from the My-T-Touch Menu.

Oversize Window Options

Oversize refers to the state when theMy-T-Touch window is wider than the screendisplay width. These are the options availablehere to accommodate the user.

Enable Screen-Edge Scroll

156


When the My-T-Touch window (keyboarddisplay window) is larger than the actualdisplay (e.g. My-T-Touch is wider than thescreen width), select this option to enable theautomatic scroll when the mouse pointer(cursor) is held at the edge of the screen. IfMy-T-Touch is off-screen at that edge, it willautomatically scroll completely into view whenthis option is checked On.

System Information DisplayDialog BoxThe System Information Dialog Box allowsyou to select which options are to be displayedin the Information Panel:

This is the System Information Panel.

157


You can click on-and-off each individualCheck-Button. The options with a check-markwill be displayed each time you startMy-T-Touch. To Sort the display, either addindividually or click on the item in the SystemInformation window to move the item to thefront of the list (leftmost).



My-T-Touch Colors Dialog158


Box

Select Color Source Select "Use SystemColors" to use the Windows scheme (availablein Display Properties, Appearance)

NOTE:

When System Colors are used in conjunctionwith 3D keys, only pure RGB colors areallowed. (RGB - Red, Green, Blue - 3 valuesbetween 0 and 255 indicating the amount ofRed, Green, or Blue used to "build" a color -

159


this is sometimes referred to as 24-bit color (3x 1 byte <=> 3 x 8 bits = 24 bits) - pure RGBmeans a value of either 0 or 255 (no bits set, orall bits set)) Due to the shading & desire for aclean appearance, preservation of the systemcolor is not possible (disable 3D keys to seeactual system color). The following algorithmis used to create a "pure" RGB color: Thesystem color is split into the 3 RGBcomponents, and then the smallest value issubtracted away from all elements, leaving 0,1, or 2 positive values - these then are used todetermine use of a solid color (i.e. value of255) or no color (i.e. a value of 0). This is usedas the "background" of the shaded keys. Inmost cases, this is in the same color scheme asthe System Colors. You may adjust theWindows Appearance, "Display 3D keys", orrevert back to "Use Panel Colors" to review thevarious display options.

160


Select "Use Panel Colors" to use My-T-TouchColors. My-T-Touch colors allows you tocustomize My-T-Touch by coloring eachpanel’s keys and buttons.

Panel Colors

In order to color a My-T-Touch panel, do thefollowing steps:

Select Panel to Color

1. Choose among the seven panels.

2. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button of the panel you wish tocolor.

Select Item to be Colored

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button of the part of the button youwish to color. You may also Click on the

161


appropriate area of the oversized button onthe right.

2. Click on a color that is provided below (16colors) to select the color.

3. The item you have selected will change itscolor, and show you a preview of the in theoversized button window.

4. Repeat this process for all button parts youwant to color.

Once you are finished coloring one panel, youeither press OK Button to save, or selectanother panel to color. If you select anotherpanel to be colored, the previous colored panelwill change its colors immediately.

Use current Colors on all Panels

If you want your current selected colors to bethe colors for all panels, press this button.

Set Panel Colors to Default162


If you want to return one or all your panels totheir default colors, press this button. Tochange one panel back to default colors, do thefollowing steps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button of the panel you wish tochange.

2. Click on "Set Panel Colors to Default"button.

3. The colors will return to default.

To change all panels back to default colors, dothe following steps:

1. After completing 1-3 above, press "Usecurrent Colors on all Panels".

2. All panels will change to default colors.

Keyboard Background

163


To Select Keyboard Background Color

Use the Keyboard Background Button tochange the color of the keyboard background& frame.

My-T-Touch BackgroundColors Dialog Box

This Dialog Box allows you to switch thecolors of the My-T-Touch panels. Thefollowing panels will be affected:

164


1. Alpha Keyboard Panel

2. Edit Panel

In order to select a color for My-T-Touchpanels, do the following steps:

1. Click on the picture of the color you wantMy-T-Touch to be. A black frame willappear around your selection.



165


Fonts

IMPORTANT NOTE:

The Font capabilities of My-T-Touch arelimited for a variety of reasons. These limitedoptions have only been included as a specificsolution for a small subset of customers. UseMy-T-Touch Build-A-Board for more completecontrol over the appearance.

Base / Medium / Large Selections

Sizes 1-6 are the Base sizes. For almost all

166


uses, the MyTMouse font is the best choice.

Medium Sizes are 7-9.

Large Sizes are 10-12.

Select Button for Base / Medium / Large

Each button selects the corresponding sizerange font. A System Font Selection dialog isavailable to select from installed fonts.

Only the (Font) Face Name is preserved.

Character Set for Base / Medium / Large

For MyTMouse, use 22. For most others, 0 isthe best choice (ANSI). Symbols use characterset 2. Other choices are:

ANSI_CHARSET = 0

DEFAULT_CHARSET = 1

SYMBOL_CHARSET = 2

MyTMouse = 22

167


MAC_CHARSET = 77

SHIFTJIS_CHARSET = 128

HANGEUL_CHARSET = 129

HANGUL_CHARSET = 129

JOHAB_CHARSET = 130

GB2312_CHARSET = 134

CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET = 136

GREEK_CHARSET = 161

TURKISH_CHARSET = 162

VIETNAMESE_CHARSET 163

HEBREW_CHARSET = 177

ARABIC_CHARSET = 178

BALTIC_CHARSET = 186

RUSSIAN_CHARSET = 204

THAI_CHARSET = 222

168


EASTEUROPE_CHARSET = 238

OEM_CHARSET = 255

1 Character Size Adjust for Base / Medium /Large

This setting refers to the amount subtractedfrom the available area of the key (total pixels)used to display the font character. Even thoughit strongly affects key displays of 1 character(i.e. alphanumeric keys on the Keyboard(Alpha) panel), it does have some effect on allbuttons displayed. In some ways, this is similarto the Key border concept in Operation Options- the only use for this value is in calculating thebest point size for the key display.

169


Select Keyboard Layouts

Click on the Keyboards Button.

My-T-Touch can operate with many different170


keyboard layouts. By selecting the samekeyboard layout that Windows uses, you cansynchronize the display on My-T-Touch withthe characters generated in your application.

The main US keyboard layout is called the 101United States Standard (sometimes called theQWERTY layout (for the top left row ofkeys)). To change to a different US Keyboardlayout, do the following:

1. On the right-hand side of the dialog, Selecta layout by clicking on its name.

2. Press the OK Button. (If you do not wantto change the current layout, press theCANCEL button).

Some Special US Layouts

Dvorak Standard

Dvorak Left Handed

171


Dvorak Right Handed

My-T-Easy - alphabetically ordered (ABC)keyboard layout

Note: The special US layouts will onlyoperate correctly with the US Standardlayout selected in Windows.

In order to change the My-T-Touch keyboardlayout to another language, do the followingsteps:

1. Select a language (layout) by clicking onits name.

2. Press the OK Button. (If you do not wantto change the selected language, press theCANCEL button).

172


Important: This process will only changethe My-T-Touch keyboard layout. If youwish to change your physical keyboardlayout, you must change your Windowsdriver from the Windows Control Panel(available in Keyboard Properties, Layout).

For proper font display & typing, you mayneed to set Regional Settings (available inRegional Settings).

For additional notes, see Keyboard Layouts &Windows and see Advanced Notes onKeyboard Layouts.

When an International keyboard is selected,My-T-Touch offers the option to run theWindows Control Panel. On some Internationallayouts, the right [Alt] key becomes acombination [Ctrl][Alt] keystroke, and may belabeled [AltGr].

173


Important: Many non-US layoutsincorporate an additional key not availableon the 101 layouts. In almost all cases, therecommended and supported layout is the104 layout for any non-US selection. Insome cases, only the 104 layout has beenupdated.

Additional Keyboard Notes:

Note: Some layouts date back to Windows3.1/Windows 95. These layouts arelabeled "(old)". For later releases ofWindows, these layouts may not matchchanges to the current keyboard layouts inWindows. Some layouts may only operatecorrectly under Windows 95/98 - refer tothe layouts available in your version ofWindows to select which layout to use inMy-T-Touch.

174


The old layouts are included as areference & reminder that keyboardlayouts are not as consistent as one mightbelieve. Because manufacturers haveflexibility in keyboard layouts (e.g. look atdifferent laptop keyboards), constantchanges to the underlying operatingsystem, and there are no specificinternational standards that can be usedas a reference, a keyboard layout can onlybe viewed as snapshot in time. And for allwe know, these "old" layouts may one daybe useful again. Refer to Developer Kitutilities for further information on Keyboardlayouts, and refer to IMG’s Build-A-Boardfor full keyboard layout customizationcapabilities.

Asian layouts require fonts for the East Asianlanguages - on some versions of Windows,these are not installed automatically - refer to

175


Regional and Language options in ControlPanel for adding these supplemental files. Notethat the Asian languages may not be supportedat all in certain versions of Windows!

Some layouts are designed for operation in thelocalized versions of Windows. Arabic, Greek,Hebrew, Russian, & Central / Eastern Europeanlayouts may not correctly display all charactersif a different ANSI code page is in use.

Typical users operate with only 1 keyboardlayout, but it is possible to switch betweenactive layouts for various applications inWindows. To automatically have My-T-Touchsynchronize with changes to the active layoutin Windows, refer to the KeyboardSync utilityin the Developer’s Kit.

Select Custom Build-A-Board Layouts

176


There are a few sample, custom Build-A-BoardLayouts available. Additional Build-A-Boardlayouts can be created, and when placed in theInstallation Folder will be added to this list.When selected, the KEYBOARD.KBF in theusers configuration folder is replaced with theselected layout. When My-T-Touch is run, thelayout is recognized, and the Build-A-Boardcompatible run-time (MYTSOFT2.EXE) isused to operate with the version 2.x keyboardlayouts.

177


Using Build-A-Board Layouts: CustomBuild-A-Board layouts are displayed byMYTSOFT2.EXE (which is a completelydifferent executable program), and assuch, the configuration optionsdocumented for My-T-Touch are notreferenced or used by the Build-A-Boardbased executable. All configurationoptions available for Build-A-Board layoutsare controlled via Build-A-Board, andcontained within the 2.x version layout file(KeyBoard File (KBF File)). The supportfor Build-A-Board custom layouts isavailable as part of the license toMy-T-Touch to add even more flexibilityand utility to the My-T-Touch product.However, a separate license forBuild-A-Board is required to obtain all thecapabilities of Build-A-Board. Forcontinuity and name recognition, thetrademarked name My-T-Soft is used forboth the newer Build-A-Board layouts(2.xx version) and original software (1.xx

178


version), along with the fullyencompassing My-T-Soft Family.

Keyboard Layouts &WindowsWindows has various Regional & KeyboardLayout settings, and these are best managedwithin the Windows Control panel. Changingthe Keyboard in My-T-Touch only affectsMy-T-Touch. Proper operation of the selectedlayout may depend on the version of Windows,your current Keyboard Layout, and Regional(International) settings.

If you wish to change the physical keyboardlayout used by Windows, you must changeyour Windows driver from the WindowsControl Panel (available in Keyboard

179


Properties, Layout). You may be required tohave your Windows CD (or originalinstallation media) when loading a previouslyunused keyboard layout.

For proper font display & typing, you mayneed to set Regional Settings (available inRegional Settings).

NOTES:

When an International keyboard is selected,My-T-Touch offers the option to run theWindows Control Panel.

On some International layouts, the right [Alt]key becomes a combination [Ctrl][Alt]keystroke, and may be labeled [AltGr].

My-T-Touch keyboard layouts include thecharacters displayed on My-T-Touch and thelow-level keyboard scancodes (scancodes arethe hardware level information about whichkey was pressed). Most keyboard layouts are

180


similar, but if you experience improper displayor incorrectly typed characters, you must verifythe My-T-Touch layout, Windows KeyboardProperties, and Windows Regional Settings.

Font character set, AltGr handling, and theLowercase display setting are automaticallyupdated when required for keyboard layoutsselected through My-T-Touch Setup. Refer toAdvanced Notes on Keyboard Layouts foradditional documentation.

Font & Character set issues can be referencedin Fonts.

Advanced Notes onKeyboard LayoutsKeyboard Layouts & Specific Notes

Notes:

181


The keyboard language/layout must bechanged for the keyboard to type correctlybased on the Windows Keyboard Layout,Windows Regional settings, and the displayedLayout.

Most users operate on one version of Windows,and are used to one keyboard layout. Afterselecting the layout when they first configureMy-T-Touch, they may never return to theKeyboard Layout selection again. This is whatthe objective was for the design & approach tohandling keyboard layouts in My-T-Touch.Changing the keyboard layout in My-T-Touchonly affect My-T-Touch’s display & operation.To synchronize the display and operation withWindows, both My-T-Touch and Windowsmust be set to the same layout.

During the various updates in Windowsversions, keyboard layouts have changed. Keyshave been moved/added, internal scan codes

182


changed, etc. It is important to note there is nostandards body that determines what aparticular keyboard layout should be.Technically, it is left up to the manufacturer todetermine the physical keyboard layout (e.g.look at different keyboard layouts onlaptops/notebooks/desktops). Microsoft mustsupport these different hardwareimplementations, and also is involved in layoutmodifications (e.g. adding keys, such as theWindows Key). The end result is that thekeyboard layout files must be viewed asdynamic and may be different between oneversion of Windows and the next. If youexperience a problem with a layout, pleasecontact technical support, or refer to ourDeveloper’s Corner(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm) foroptions available.

Regional Settings (Refer to notes below)

183


Optional = the Regional Settings doesn’t haveto change for showing the correct labels.

Suggested = the Regional Settings has tochange for showing the correct labels

Char Set numbers has to be changed inMy-T-Touch to matching keyboardlanguage/layout.

There are several settings that take affect whenthe keyboard is selected through My-T-TouchSetup. The appropriate character set isautomatically selected, the status of whether ornot the software should handle the AltGrkeystroke is set, and the setting for whether ornot the Lowercase display is allowed on thekeyboard panel is set for some layouts.Because of display issues, these settings havebeen pre-set for various layouts. Refer toAdvanced User notes and the setting forKeyboardUpdate (in initialization filedescription), and see manual setting below for

184


additional details on the actual implementation.

In some cases, the logic behind theupper/lowercase display causes minor displayissues with certain layouts - these issues aredocumented under the layout.

Arabic

Char Set = 178

Belarusian

Regional Settings = Belarusian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Belarusian/Belarusian

Char Set = 204

Bulgarian

Regional Settings = Bulgarian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Bulgarian/Bulgarian

Char Set = 204185


Bulgarian (Latin)

Regional Settings = Bulgarian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Bulgarian/Bulgarian (Latin)

Char Set = 204

Croatian

Regional Settings = Croatian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Croatian/Croatian

Char Set = 238

Czech (Qwerty)

Regional Settings = Czech (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Czech/Czech(Qwerty)

Char Set = 238

Czech

186


Regional Settings = Czech (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Czech/Czech

Char Set = 238

Estonian (Code Page might not be fullysupported by some version of Windows)

Regional Settings = Estonian (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Estonian/Estonian

Char Set = 186

Suggested Font: MS Sans Serif

Greek

Regional Settings = Greek (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Greek/Greek

Char Set = 161

Hebrew

Char Set = 177187


Hungarian

Regional Settings = Hungarian (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Hungarian/Hungarian

Char Set = 238

Irish

Regional Settings = English (Ireland)(Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = English(Ireland)/Irish

Char Set = 0

Korean

Regional Settings = Korean

Keyboard Language/Layout = Korean (IME)

Char Set = 129

188


On the 104 layout, the key above the enter andnext to the right-shift appear the same. Thecorrect letter is displayed in Windows Vista/7,but not in Windows XP. The 2 keys generatedifferent virtual keys (220 & 226), but bothgenerate the same character.

Latvian (Latin) (Code Page might not befully supported by some version ofWindows)

Regional Settings = Latvian (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Latvian/Latvian(Latin)

Char Set = 186

Latvian (Code Page might not be fullysupported by some version of Windows)

Regional Settings = Latvian (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Latvian/Latvian

Char Set = 186189


Polish

Regional Settings = Polish (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Polish/Polish

Char Set = 238

Polish Programmer

Regional Settings = Polish (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Polish/Polish

Char Set = 238

Romanian

Regional Settings = Romanian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Romanian/Romanian

Char Set = 238

Russian

Regional Settings = Russian (Suggested)

190


Keyboard Language/Layout = Russian/Russian

Char Set = 204

Slovak

Regional Settings = Slovak (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Slovak/Slovak

Char Set = 238

Slovak (Qwerty)

Regional Settings = Slovak (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Slovak/Slovak(Qwerty)

Char Set = 238

Turkish (F Type)

Regional Settings = Turkish (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Turkish/Turkish(F type)

Char Set = 162191


Turkish (Q Type)

Regional Settings = Turkish (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Turkish/Turkish(Q type)

Char Set = 162

HOW TO SETUP ADDITIONALKEYBOARD LAYOUTS MANUALLY

Make sure the My-T-Touch keyboard is closedduring these steps!

Step 1) Copy All (or the appropriate)KYBD????.KMF file to the My-T-TouchInstallation folder

\Program Files\MYTTOUCH

Step 2) Modify the MYTTOUCH.INI file

Important: Refer to the ConfigPath entryin the Initialization file to determine which

192


MYTTOUCH.INI file is the correct file tomodify!

- My-T-Touch Setup | Configuration | SpecialOptions | Edit Initialization File

- Find the Keyboard=? setting in the[Configuration] section (top of file)

- Change to the appropriate numberedkeyboard layout

Layout Numbers

The values 1-96, and 101-196, and any 200+entries listed are valid, and are related asfollows:

01 = U.S. Standard, 02 = U.S. DvorakStandard, 03 = U.S. Dvorak Left-Handed, 04 =U.S. Dvorak Right-Handed, 05 = U.S.My-T-Easy (ABC) Alphabetic Keyboard, 06 =Belgian (comma), 07 = British, 08 = Canadian

193


Multi-lingual, 09 = Danish, 10 = Dutch, 11 =Finnish, 12 = French, 13 = French Canadian,14 = German, 15 = Icelandic, 16 = Italian, 17 =Latin American, 18 = Norwegian, 19 =Portuguese, 20 = Spanish, 21 = Swedish, 22 =Swiss French, 23 = Swiss German, 24 = U.S.International, 25 = Hungarian (Old), 26 =Belgian (period), 27 = Arabic, 28 = Belarusian,29 = Bulgarian, 30 = Bulgarian (Latin), 31 =Croatian, 32 = Czech (Old), 33 = Czech(Qwerty), 34 = Estonian, 35 = Greek, 36 =Hebrew, 37 = Hungarian, 38 = Irish, 39 =Latvian, 40 = Latvian (Latin), 41 = Polish(Old), 42 = Romanian, 43 = Russian (old), 44= Slovak, 45 = Slovak (Qwerty), 46 = Turkish(F type), 47 = Turkish (Q type), 48 = Spanish(Mexico), 49 = U.S. Fazekas, 50 = U.S.Chubon, 51 = Slovenian, 52=Japanese, 53 =Chinese, 54 = Korean, 55 = French (Belgian),56 = French (Luxembourg), 57 = German(Austrian), 58 = German (Leichtenstein), 59 =

194


German (Luxembourg), 60 = Spanish(Argentina), 61 = Spanish (Bolivia), 62 =Spanish (Chile), 63 = Spanish (Columbia), 64= Spanish (Costa Rica), 65 = Spanish(Dominican Republic), 66 = Spanish(Ecuador), 67 = Dutch (Belgian), 68 = Dutch(Netherlands), 69 = Italian (Switzerland), 70 =Norwegian (Bokmal), 71 = Portuguese(Brazilian), 72 = Spanish (Guatemala), 73 =Spanish (El Salvador), 74 = Spanish(Honduras), 75 = Spanish (Modern Sort), 76 =Spanish (Nicaragua), 77 = Spanish (Panama),78 = Spanish (Paraguay), 79 = Spanish (Peru),80 = Spanish (Puerto Rico), 81 = Spanish(Uruguay), 82 = Spanish (Venezuela), 83 =English (Australian), 84 = English (NewZealand), 85 = English (Jamaica), 86 = English(United Kingdom), 87 = Chinese (Cangjie), 88= Canadian Multilingual, 89 = Polish, 90 =Polish Programmer, 91 = Thai, 92 = U.S.Plum, 93 = Russian (Cyrillic), 94 = Danish

195


(ABC), 95 = U.S. (Numpad Enter), 96 =Czech, 97 = Belgian (period), 101-197 are the104 key layouts matching the above, 200 = 104British (1st alternate), 201 = 104 British (2ndalternate), 202 = 104 Hebrew (Alt.), 203 = 104Chinese (Zhuyin) (Alt.), 204 = 104 Arabic(Alt.)

- Save the file

Step 3) Change the Font / Character Set

- My-T-Touch Setup | Configuration | Fonts

- See above for character set numbers

Step 4) Verify Windows Keyboard Layout &Regional Settings

Step 5) Close My-T-Touch Setup, runMy-T-Touch

196


Build-A-Macro

Click on the Build-A-Macro Button.

My-T-Touch lets you create your own Macrosto work within Windows and DOS in a

197


Window. In My-T-Touch, a Macro is asequence of keystrokes or actions tied to abutton. The Macro is initiated by selecting thebutton.

A virtually unlimited number of user-definedpanels can be created. Each panel can groupkeys that support actions such as: Applicationmacros, Commands, Keystroke sequences,names, addresses, pre-defined paragraphs,letters, and even launch Programs.

Click on the Select Macro Panel Pull-downbox to choose an existing panel.

Click on Add A Panel to add a new panel.

Click on Delete Panel to delete the currentpanel.

Click on Document Panel to createdocumentation for the selected panel.

Click on Document All Panels to create

198


documentation for all Macro Panels.

The selected Macro Panel is displayed on theright. Click on the top button to modifyfeatures & properties of the Macro Panel, andclick on any button to create / edit the Macrotriggered by that button. The Main MacroPanel cannot be deleted, however all of its keysmay be changed (except the panel (top) key).

Advanced Notes: The panels includedhave been setup with various options tohelp illustrate the functions available. Theymay be changed or deleted as you desire.When running My-T-Touch, clicking the toppanel of the Main Macro panel will openMy-T-Touch Setup and go directly toBuild-A-Macro. This is useful for fastmacro panel / button changes. MacroPanels may be nested up to ten levels.Clicking on the top button of a nestedpanel will return to the previous panel,which is a shortcut for advanced users. In

199


general, it is better to use a button toindicate the panel to open.

Limitations

There is an upper limit of 2000 charactersmaintained by the Build-A-Macro section ofMy-T-Touch. This amount was arbitrarilyselected as enough keystrokes to do just aboutany kind of task. Note that one character canresult in as many as 10 keystrokes beingrequired to generate the character via theselected active keyboard layout in Windows.Therefore it is possible that a large amount oftext may overflow the 32000 bytes reserved forthese macros (i.e. 3 bytes per keystroke x 10keystrokes x 1000 characters). If these limitsare reached during macro operation, thefollowing issues may be relevant:

200


• Not all characters may be generated from thesaved Macro

• The Shift, Alt, and Ctrl keys may be in anundefined state.

• Any additional keystrokes or macros maynot operate properly until the Shift, Alt &Ctrl keys are synchronized to the system.

• Only characters not represented by the activekeyboard layout require may push theselimits - either limit the macro character sizeto under 500 characters, or select a moreappropriate keyboard layout for thecharacters required.

Steps to create a new Macro panel and insert anew Macro.

Click on Add a Panel.

In the new dialog box, add a 5 characteridentifier, for example Word.

201


In the Macro Panel Description, enter someinformation for your own use, for exampleWord for Windows.


On the right side of the dialog box, a blankMacro panel will appear.

Click on the first button (top left corner).

A new dialog box opens. Here you define yourMacro Button.

First, enter a key label, for example Open.

Under Key Description [Quick Help], enterwhat you would like to appear in the quickhelp bar on top of My-T-Touch.

Under This Key will... select which option youwould like the button to perform.

In this case, you want to launch an application.

Click on Launch an Application.

202


If you do not know the correct path for yourapplication, find the applications executablefile by using the browse button.

Click on the OK Button.

Verify your action.

Steps to create a keystroke Macro.

• Press on the next empty button.

• Under key label, enter "PreVu".

• Under description, enter "Shows a PrintPreview".

• Click on Activate Keystroke Macro.

• Click on Zoom.

Here you will create your keystroke Macro.

• Use the up-and-down arrows to select theappropriate keystrokes.

203


• In this case, double-click on Alt-Down toinsert the keystroke (i.e. pressing the Altbutton down).

• Now, double-click on the letter F.

• Now, release the Alt button bydouble-clicking on Alt-Up.

• Finally, double-click on the letter v.

• This Macro will bring up the Print Previewwhile running MS Word!

• Click on the OK Button.

• Verify your action.

Information on AdvancedMacro Editing

When working with Macro Panels, there are

204


various advanced options available to managethe panels, including documenting every detailof the panel (or panels) as a text file.

Add-A-Macro Dialog Box

Macro Panel ID

Enter a five letter identifier for your new MacroPanel.

This identifier will appear on the top button oryour new Macro Panel.

205


Macro Panel Description

Enter a description for your new panel. Thisdescription will appear in the Quick Help barwhen activated.

Click on the OK Button to save the currentoptions.

Click on the CANCEL button to Close the &cancel the Add operation.

Once you have added a panel, it will beautomatically selected for editing.

206


Delete-A-Macro Dialog Box

Delete this Macro Panel?

The Macro panel named in the box belowMacro Panel ID will be deleted.

207


WarningUse with extremecaution. Once the panelis deleted, it cannot berecovered! Press theOK Button to Delete theSelected Macro Panel. Ifyou do not want todelete your panel, pressthe CANCEL button.

Note: You cannot delete the Main MacroPanel.

Document Macro Dialog

208


Box

The documentation will correspond to theselected Macro Panel.

Post to Clipboard

Click on this button to Post the PanelDocumentation onto the Windows Clipboard.You may then paste the textual informationinto any word processor, or other applicationthat uses text.

Save to File

This will open the File Save Dialog which willallow you to save the textual PanelDocumentation to a file & save the information

209


to disk.

Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog& cancel the documentation operation.

Document All MacrosDialog BoxThe documentation contains All Paneldocumentation for All Macro Panels.

Post to Clipboard

Click on this button to Post the All PanelDocumentation onto the Windows Clipboard.You may then paste the textual information

210


into any word processor, or other applicationthat uses text.

Save to File

This will open the File Save Dialog which willallow you to save All the textual PanelDocumentation to a file & save the informationto disk.

Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog& cancel the documentation operation.

Documentation File SaveDialog BoxYou may simply enter the name of the filename you wish to save in the File Name box onthe left, or select the file name from an existingfile in your system. Once you have entered orselected the name, click on the OK Button to

211


save the file. Press the CANCEL button toClose the Dialog & cancel the File Saveoperation.

Macro Key Dialog Box

Key Identifiers

Enter a key label. This label will appear on thekey in the Macro Panel. Enter a key

212


description. The key description will appear inthe Quick Help bar.

This key will...

Activate Keystroke Macro

Click on this Radio-Button if you want tocreate a Macro consisting of keystrokes. Usethe edit box below (Keystroke Macro) to enteryour Macro, or press Zoom to use the MacroEditor. You may use any Windows supportedANSI characters.

Note: As keys are entered, characters aretreated as both the press and releaseevents. Case is preserved, and Caps Lockis assumed OFF when playing back themacro. Therefore, using lowercasecharacters is preferred. If a Keystrokemacro is initiated with the Caps Lock on,then the Macro WILL be affected and theend-result may not be as originally

213


intended!

Open Macro Panel

Click on this Radio-Button if you want to openanother panel. Enter the Macro name in theedit box below (Macro Panel), or press Selectto select an existing Macro Panel.

Launch Application

Click on this Radio-Button if you want toassign an application to your Macro button.Enter the application name and path in the editbox below (Application), or press Browse toselect an application. You may also enter aWorking Directory, which will be the currentdirectory used by the Application once it islaunched. Short file names are used formaximum compatibility.

User Notes / Details214


You may enter helpful information, notes, ordetails regarding the settings for this key. Thisis used only for reference and will appear onthe Panel Documentation.

Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo

These shortcut keys may be used to manipulatethe text. This may help you enter information& interact with other Windows applications.

Copy Key, Paste Key, Clear Key

These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate& operate within My-T-Touch Setup / MacroKey Editing. For example, you could CopyKey information from an existing panel to bepasted into another Macro Panel.


Click on the CANCEL button to Close theDialog & cancel any changes.

215


Macro Panel Dialog Box

When you click on the top button of a MacroPanel in My-T-Touch Setup, you may edit thePanel settings for the current Macro Panel.

Panel Label

Enter a panel label. This label will appear onthe top key in the Macro Panel.

Enter a panel description. The panel

216


description will appear in the Quick Help bar,if it is open.

This panel will...

Open

Click on this Radio-Button if you want to openthis Macro Panel. This means no additionalaction will occur when the panel is opened.

Open and launch Application

Click on this Radio-Button if you want toassign an application to this Macro Panel.Enter the application name and path in the editbox below (Application), or press Browse toselect an application. You may also enter aWorking Directory that will become thecurrent directory when the Application islaunched. When accessed, the panel will open& then automatically launch the application.

Open When Window Active

217


Click on this Radio-Button if you want yourMacro Panel to be open as soon as theapplication is opened. Enter the applicationname in the edit box below Window Name, orpress Select to choose from currently activewindows. You MUST take the Window namefrom the caption bar of your application. ItMUST appear exactly as on the caption bar.For example, the caption bar title for this helpfile is "Macro Panel Dialog Box". The nameentered should not have information includinga current file name, or open document. Youmay also shorten the name to provideadditional functionality. For example, if youenter the name as "Word", the Macro Panelwill automatically enter when the MicrosoftWord, WordPad, or WordPerfect is active.

Note: Because of the system memoryrequired for this operation and constantmonitoring, it will affect the system speed!

218


User Notes / Details

You may enter helpful information, notes, ordetails regarding the settings for this panel.This is only used for reference and to appearon the Panel Documentation.

Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo

These shortcut keys may be used to manipulatethe text. This may help you enter information& interact with other Windows applications.

Copy Panel, Paste Panel, Clear Panel

These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate& operate within My-T-Touch Setup / PanelEditing. For example, you could Copy Panelinformation from an existing panel to be pastedinto a newly created panel.


219


Click on the CANCEL button to Close theDialog & cancel any changes.

Macro Zoom Dialog Box

Key Label

Key label will show which button is currentlyedited.

Key Description

220


Enter a detailed description (will appear onQuick Help).

In order to create a keystroke Macro followthese steps:

There are six vertical selection lists in thebottom left corner of the dialog box. Select &double-click to add to the Keystroke Macro.

• Use the up-and-down arrows to select theappropriate keystrokes, then double-click toenter into the Keystroke Macro.

• For example, double-click on Alt-Down tosimulate pressing the Alt button down.

• Now, double-click on the letter F.

• Now, release the Alt button bydouble-clicking on Alt-Up.

• Finally, double-click on the letter v.

221


• This Macro [Alt-Down]f[Alt-Up]v willbring up the Print Preview while runningMS Word!

You may edit the Keystroke Macro directly inthe Edit window. You may wish to refer to theAdvanced User Notes for options & detailsregarding the keystroke macros.

Reserved words in brackets [ ] will onlyfunction properly when typed exactly! Theymay be used to indicate combinationkeystrokes. For example, to execute Ctrl-S itmust appear as [Ctrl-Down]s[Ctrl-Up]. Thisallows you to execute more than one characterwith the combination key depressed.

NOTE: For proper operation, you must haveEVERY keystroke required! (Don’t forget[Enter]) If the macro does not operate asdesired, review & verify that each keystrokeand the sequence of keystrokes is accurate.Also make sure that the correct Application is

222


Active when the Macro is initiated.

There are seven buttons with standard editingoptions:

CUT - Cuts the highlighted portion of a Macro.

COPY - Copies the highlighted portion of aMacro.

PASTE - Pastes the highlighted portion of aMacro (must be preceded by a CUT or COPY).

DELETE - Deletes the highlighted portion of aMacro. (UNDO will not recover!)

UNDO - Undoes the previous operation (like aCUT OR DELETE).

SELECT ALL - Selects the whole Macro.

OPTIONS - Changes to a different set of sevenediting buttons.

There are seven buttons with advanced editingoptions (Useful if you are pasting in text from

223


other applications):

CLEAR ALL - Clears the editing Window,even if nothing is highlighted. (Erases theentire macro).

CR - Changes carriage returns to [Enter].(ANSI character 13)

CRLF - Changes carriage return-line feed to[Enter}. (ANSI characters 13 10)

TAB - Changes tab to [Tab]. (ANSI character9)

STRIP - Strips all ANSI characters. (Removesall non-ANSI characters from text)

ALL - Does all of the above (CRLF, TAB,STRIP)

EDITING - Returns to the previous sevenbuttons.

The Open and Save buttons are available asconveniences for developers using the

224


MACROBAT and other IMG utilities. Thesewill use the Zoom Edit screen as an the Editingarea - Open will open, read, and place thecontents of a previously Saved Macro into theZoom Edit area. The KMF (Keyboard MacroFile) format is used.

The special selections [Time], [Date], and[Pause] can be used as follows: [Time] and[Date] insert the current system time asformatted via the System Information panel(formatted as set in the Windows RegionalSettings).

[Pause] inserts an "empty" keystroke in thesequence of keystrokes. This is a special optionalong with other specialty macros otherwiseundocumented.


Click on the CANCEL button to Close the

225


Dialog & cancel any changes.

Macro Select Dialog Box

Use the up-and-down arrows or your Mouse toselect one of the existing Macro panels.

Press Enter, or click on OK Button.

Click on the CANCEL button to Close theDialog & cancel any selection.

226


Active Window Dialog Box

This list shows all of the current activewindows running on your system. You mayselect the Window Name from the list. Youmay wish to modify the name to remove anyopen documents, or other information that maychange. My-T-Touch must have an exact matchto recognize the need to automatically open theMacro Panel.

Once you have found the name double click onit or highlight your selection & click on the OKButton. Press the CANCEL button to Close the

227


Dialog & cancel the Select operation.

Browse Programs Dialog Box

This opens the My-T-Touch Browse that allowsyou to select from available programs on yoursystem. Short file names are used formaximum compatibility. Once you have foundthe name of the program to run double click onit or highlight your selection & click on theOpen Button Press the Cancel button to Closethe Dialog & cancel the Browse operation.

Configure your Mouse

228


Buttons

Click on the Mouse Buttons Button

Important: The term Mouse is used

229


generically for any pointing device thatmoves the cursor (mouse pointer) withinWindows. For Pen and Touchscreendrivers, often only 1 button is available(Left Button): In all cases, the Left Buttonshould be selected as the Action button.

My-T-Touch lets you define functions for allyour Mouse buttons (2 or 3 button Mice). Thiscan make you work more efficiently byeliminating frequently used tasks and keycombinations.

Select Mouse Button to use on My-T-TouchHere you define which button on your Mouseis going to be used as a point-and-click button.This button will be the execution button.

Select Type of Mouse

If you have a two-button Mouse, click on2-Button Mouse. If you have a three-button

230


Mouse, click on 3-Button Mouse.

Note: If you have a three button Mouse,be sure that you are loading the correctdriver. If you are loading a two-buttonMouse driver with a three-button Mouse,you will not be able to use the middlebutton. Go to Windows Control Panel |Mouse to install a different Mouse driver.

Mouse Button Action Pull-down Boxes Inorder to assign a different function to theMy-T-Touch Mouse buttons, do the followingsteps:

1. Click on the down-arrow of the 1stPull-down box.

2. Use the scroll-bar to scroll up and downwithin the Pull-down box.

231


3. Select a function by clicking on its name.


5. Repeat the steps 1-4 on the 2nd Pull-downbox.


7. If you do not want to change the currentMouse buttons setup, press the CANCELbutton.

This functionality is only available while yourMouse pointer is over My-T-Touch.

Some of these actions are:

1. Ignore the button press (no reaction at all)

2. Move My-T-Touch around the screen(click and drag)

3. Look Thru My-T-Touch (while holding thebutton down you will be able to see thescreen behind My-T-Touch)

232


4. Open the My-T-Touch Menu

5. Minimize My-T-Touch

6. Choose from a list of single orcombination keystrokes, such as [Enter],[F1], [Alt-F4], etc.

Select the Cursor and Icon

Click on the Cursors & Icons Button

233


My-T-Touch enables you to select differentCursors and different Icons for use withMy-T-Touch.

Cursors

There are 12 Cursors available; 4 right-handed,4 left handed Cursors, and 4 specialty Cursors.They are on the right side, titled "Cursors". Inorder to select a Cursor, do the following steps:

1. Click on one of the 12 cursor pictures; itwill be framed by a black rectangle.

2. Press the OK Button.234


3. If you do not want to change the currentlayout, press the CANCEL button.

Note: For Touchscreen & Pen basedsystems, the "Blank" or "Invisible" cursorshould be used if other applications do notshow a cursor when in use. Otherwise,select the most appropriate cursor fromthose available.

Icons

There are 3 Icons available. They are on theleft side titled "Icons". In order to select anIcon, do the following steps:

1. Click on one of the 3 Icon pictures; it willbe framed by a black rectangle.

2. Press the OK.Button.

235


3. If you do not want to change the currentlayout, press the CANCEL button.

Note: The Icon is only used for theMinimize to Icon option in Configuration.

Exit My-T-Touch

Click on the Exit Button

236


This will exit My-T-Touch Setup and Close theMy-T-Touch Setup Window.

237

Chapter 6. My-T-TouchLogon Utilities

My-T-Touch Logon UtilitiesOverview

The My-T-Touch Logon Utilities enablecomplete operation from a pointing device,allowing secure logons to network &workstations via the on-screen keyboardinterface. Because of fundamental differencesin operation and security between the Windows2000 / XP and Windows Vista / 7 platforms,please refer to the appropriate sections whenreferencing the Logon Utilities. For support onWindows 95/98/Me & Windows NT, pleaserefer to version 1.77 or earlier.

238

Chapter 6. My-T-Touch Logon Utilities

Important Notes

• The proper configuration andimplementation of this utility requires a userwith Administrator rights

• Proper licensing is required or the Logonmodule will revert to a demonstration andeventually disable itself

• All configuration should be done via theMy-T-Touch Logon Utilities programaccessible from the Program Menu forMy-T-Touch

• In Windows Vista, Microsoft completelychanged the approach used for Logon, andno longer supports the GINA interface usedfor 2000 / XP. Refer to the My-T-TouchLogon Utilities for Windows Vista / 7 below.

239


My-T-Touch Logon Utilitiesfor Windows Vista / 7

The My-T-Touch Logon Utilities for WindowsVista / 7 have been provided to bring flexibilityto the implementation of Pen and Touchscreensystems without requiring a physical keyboard.By using the My-T-Touch Logon Utilities, thefollowing benefits can be realized:

• Consistency in the user interface

• Flexibility for different screen resolutionsand user interfaces

• Secure Logon operation without the need fora physical keyboard

• Control of user input options may provideadditional security (e.g. limiting keyboardlayout in conjunction with other logonauthentication tools)

240


In addition, the Automatic Logon option hasalso been incorporated as a convenience withinthis utility, allowing a fixed user/passwordcombination to start up Windows Vista / 7without any user interaction required.

Important Notes

• The proper configuration andimplementation of this utility requires a userwith Administrator rights

• Proper licensing is required or the Logonmodule will revert to a demonstration andeventually disable itself

• All configuration should be done via theMy-T-Touch Logon Utilities programaccessible from the Program Menu forMy-T-Touch

241


Setup / Configure LogonUtilityThere is 1 option available - Setup / ConfigureLogon Utility (My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard Logon)

The My-T-Soft 2 software used which allowscustomized layouts of the logon keyboard, anthe My-T-Soft 2 approach enables the use of aMy-T-Soft 2 keyboard during the secure logonsequence. The keyboard can be modified withIMG’s "Build-A-Board" (ANSI 2.10 version).

There is 1 section available with 2 options

242


• Use Onscreen Keyboard at Logon Screens

Use Onscreen Keyboard for data entry

When Enable Onscreen Keyboard Logon ischecked "On", the default logon options areused, but the My-T-Soft (version 2) keyboard isdisplayed within the secure logon screens. Thekeyboard layout may be modified with IMG’s"Build-A-Board." See below for optionsspecific to the My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard.

Use Onscreen Keyboard for data entry

My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard options

There are 2 approaches available whenMy-T-Soft 2 is selected for displaying thekeyboard layout (i.e. what the user sees).My-T-Soft 2 is the next generation of thepopular My-T-Touch keyboards, and has amore flexible approach to designing andoperating keyboard layouts. To addresscustomers who want customized and

243


specialized layouts, My-T-Soft 2 can readBuild-A-Board layouts (ANSI 210) along withOriginal KBF files (layouts for My-T-Mouse,My-T-Touch, My-T-Pen, My-T-Soft andOnScreen).

There are 3 generic Build-A-Board layoutsprovided - Small Keyboard, MediumKeyboard, and Large Keyboard. Smallworks well for pen system and Large is betterfor touchscreens & fingers, but the actualresolution of the display will determine thebest choice.

There are also 2 options available for dealingwith Original layouts (NOTE: These layoutsonly display the alphabetic portion of thekeyboard). Select Default 101, Currentlanguage to use a preset standard 101keyboard configuration with the currentlyselected language/layout inMy-T-Soft/My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. If you need

244


a different size, you have the option ofselecting Copy of Current Layout to copy thecurrent saved layout. This current saved layoutis the KEYBOARD.KBF in the installationdirectory. To update the layout, runMy-T-Pen/My-T-Touch/My-T-Soft, select adifferent size, then open the menu(middle-button of tool bar), and select CurrentSettings | Save Current Settings. Run theLogon Utilities, and select Copy of CurrentLayout, then click OK (this will copy theKEYBOARD.KBF into the LOGON folder).

Enable CTRL+ALT+DEL Logon Utility

When enabled, a utility with a screen displayedlarge red button is used and available at theseparate Ctrl-Alt-Del screen. It is important tounderstand this is not a security solution, but autility for systems that need to operate insituations where security policies havemachines that display this screen. It is

245


recommended that the Ctrl-Alt-Delrequirement be removed (see below for furtherinformation and how to configure a system toremove this screen). In instances when asystem will display the CTRL+ALT+DELscreen, this Logon Utility can be enabled, andwill provide a way for a touchscreen/pen baseduser to generate the system notification andbypass the screen.

Note: User Account control must beenabled (it cannot be Off) for the system togenerate the Secure Attention Sequence(SAS). Also, the system SAS.DLL must bepresent on the system (Included withWindows 7 - Windows Vista users shouldapply Service Packs or refer to Microsoft)

Technical Notes

The My-T-Soft 2 option for the Logon portion246


of Windows Vista / 7 uses MTS2.EXE, aspecial build of My-T-Soft 2 for this usage.The layout displayed by My-T-Soft 2 is theKEYBOARD.KBF file in the LOGON folderunder the installation directory. The aboveoptions in the Logon Utilities handle thismanipulation for you. If you useBuild-A-Board to create your own layout, youwill want to copy your "built" layout into theLOGON folder, AFTER selecting theMy-T-Soft 2 option in the Logon Utilities.Note that if you re-run the Logon Utilities, andclick OK on the Setup/Configuration screen,your "built" layout will be copied over! Forreference, or if you want to take over thepre-built layouts, this lists the file names andtheir associated selection in the LogonUtilities:

Small Keyboard =LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML =>

247


LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Medium Keyboard =LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Large Keyboard =LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Default 101 = LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Copy of Current Layout = KEYBOARD.KBF=> LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Note: ConfigPath changes - The Settingof ConfigPath in the Initialization file canchange where the Copy of Current Layoutuses when copying the "current" layout.This is based on the ConfigPath settingand the current user. In general, thedefault, and any ConfigPath setting otherthan ConfigPath=0 will result in copying

248


the current user’s layout and INI into theInstallation Folder. This will also have aresult of creating a new "default" layout &configuration (e.g. KEYBOARD.KBF andINI file), which will consequently be usedfor any new users running the My-T-Softsoftware on the desktop (assuming theydon’t already have a currentconfiguration). In other words, if the Copyof Current Layout is selected, from then onthe Logon layout AND the defaultMy-T-Touch layout will be this CurrentLayout when ConfigPath is set to anythingbut 0. For further details on ConfigPath,see the Initialization File Documentation.

The Small Keyboard layout project(Build-A-Board 2.10) is included asKEYBOARD.ZIP in the LOGON folder. Thelarger layouts were simply resized & cleanedup with a larger font selected.

249


Older KBF/KMF support

My-T-Soft 2 can read & operate older (i.e.pre-version 2.00) layouts, and this approach isused for the "Original Layout" selections. Thisoption is included for 2 main reasons. 1) Easierway to select different sizes, and 2) Matchselected keyboard layout in both Logon andDesktop operation. For example, if you have aDutch layout on your desktop, when one ofthese options is selected, the same layout (i.e.KMF) will be used for the Logon keyboard.

Note: There are some limitations with theMy-T-Soft 2 handling of older layouts:

The Shift-AltGr states require selectingShift, then AltGr.

Caps-Lock display always uses the Shiftlabel, and some keys may show anincorrect label vs. the character generatedby the keystroke.

250


The default font will not handle non-ANSIlayouts correctly.

Positioning

If you do not have Build-A-Board, and wish tochange the opening position of theSmall/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layouts,there is a basic utility calledKBFLOGON.EXE in the LOGON folder. Youcan access this by clicking on UpdateOpening Position (Build-A-Board Layouts).By running this utility, you can change theopening X / Y position of the current selectedBuild-A-Board layout to match your screen

251


orientation & resolution.

Original layouts are treated differently, and arecentered horizontally and position at thebottom of the screen. The KBFLOGON.EXEwill not affect this positioning, and should notbe used for these layouts.

Advanced Technical Notes: In WindowsVista / 7, the older GINA WinLogoninterface was removed, and a moreflexible "Credential Provider" interface wascreated. The DLL that manages and runsthe My-T-Soft software (keyboard) in thelogon context is theIMGLogonProvider.DLL. (Note: for 64-bitsystems, this must be a native 64-bitcompiled DLL - 1.78 Release 4 provided auser-installable update, and the 1.79includes both 32-bit & 64-bit versions).The Credential Providers are listed asclasses in the registry atHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Authentication\Credential

252


Providers, and the class ID for theIMGLogonProvider.dll is {CEE78DCC-539B-4b6c-B829-21D189C5112F} Thisentry must be in place, and the CLSIDentries in the HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTmust also be set for proper operation andintegration into the system via theCredential Provider interface.

Ctrl-Alt-Del requirement

In the Windows NT/GINA model, theCtrl-Alt-Delete special keyboard sequencecreated a Secure Attention Sequence(SAS). In the newer Windows Vista / 7security model, the Ctrl-Alt-Delete is aseparate screen. This added security is forthe physical keyboard only - if the virtualkeyboard is allowed to bypass this screen,no additional security improvement results.You can simply disable it via Local SecurityPolicy - see Control Panel | SystemMaintenance | Administrative Tools | LocalSecurity Policy - Local Policies | Security

253


Options | "Interactive Logon: Do notrequire CTRL+ALT+DEL" | Enabled. Youcan also use Start Menu | in the searchbox, type netplwiz[Enter], and refer tothe Advanced tab. Alternatively, to quicklyaccess the setting, use the Start Menu |then type secpol.msc[Enter], then gointo Local Policies | Security Options andfind the setting for: "Interactive Logon: Donot require CTRL+ALT+DEL", and set toEnabled | OK.

The reason the keyboard sequenceCtrl-Alt-Delete was chosen is the keyboardinterface (going back to the original IBMPC) generates a hardware interrupt for thiskeystroke combination. In a securedsystem, the ONLY way this hardwareinterrupt could occur is if someone wasphysically at the keyboard, pressing thosekeys. Because of the physical security thisprovided (i.e. a remote user could notgenerate this sequence), this became theevent that trigged the logon request for

254


user name/password.

In the newer logon model, if the user viathe virtual keyboard can bypass thisscreen, there is absolutely no additionalphysical security (i.e. on a system wherethe physical keyboard will NOT be used tobypass this screen). The only change isthe extra screen step. The critical issue tounderstand is no security benefit occurs ifa software only option is allowed tomimic/bypass this hardware interruptbased event - it ends up being just anotherscreen. The real issue is security vs.expectations of security, and humaninertia (i.e. familiarity with the older GINAapproach). If there is just an expectation,or inertia, that the Ctrl-Alt-Del providesreal security when accessed via thetouchscreen keyboard (or theCTRL+ALT+DEL Logon Utility), then it isimportant to review and understand thearchitecture and structure & and securityprovisions within a Windows Vista / 7

255


based system.

If a physical component is necessary (andyou do not or can not use the physicalkeyboard), then for a true/secureapproach, a smart card, biometric, orother physical approach may be required.There really is no additional "security" thatthe keyboard software can provide (with orwithout the Ctrl-Alt-Del requirement).

Configure Automatic Logonfor Windows Vista / 7

• Open My-T-Touch Logon Utilities fromStart Menu | (All) Programs | My-T-Touch

• Select Setup Automatic Logon

256


There are 3 options available

1. Enable Auto Logon

2. Default Logon Name

3. Default Password

The Name and Password fields are disabledunless the Enable Auto Logon is checked On.

Check Enable Auto Logon On to enable theautomatic logon of the Default User / DefaultPassword combination. You must enter a validUser Name along with the proper Password toensure proper operation of the AutomaticLogon.

257


Notes:

• If the Default User Name has a blankPassword, this option will only work once -the next time you turn on the system, theName / Password Logon screen will appear.A Password must be entered to ensureproper operation of the Automatic Logon.

• You must have Administrator Rights toupdate the system with any changes.

Technical Notes: This section andsettings are just a convenient userinterface to registry settings specified byMicrosoft (dating back to Window NT) toallow an automatic user logon. There aresecurity issues - check with a SystemAdministrator if there are any questionsabout using this convenience feature.There are 3 entries affected by thissection: DefaultUserName, De-

258


faultPassword, and AutoAdminLogon in theHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/Microsoft/WindowsNT/CurrentVersion/WinLogon registry key.When enabled, AutoAdminLogon=1, andwhen disabled, AutoAdminLogon=0. TheDefaultPassword entry is stored as plaintext. For an automatic logon,AutoAdminLogon=1, and a validDefaultUserName with correctDefaultPassword must be set.

259

Part III.My-T-TouchTechnical

Documentation

Advanced UserNotes, TechnicalDocumentation,File Information,

and various Other

Information aboutMy-T-Touch.

Chapter 7 - Advanced User Notes detailsadditional product information, Final ReleaseNotes, Technical Notes, Developerinformation, product history, and CustomerSuggestions.

Chapter 8 - Files & File Notes & InstallationInformation lists all files, general information,location, along with usage details. AdditionalInstallation Information is also included here.

Chapter 9 - Operation Notes is a collectionof specific issues, advanced notes, andadditional documentation on Build-A-Macro,Command Line options, Sounds, andBuild-A-Board support.

Chapter 10 - Initialization File

Documentation provides comprehensivetechnical documentation on all theconfiguration settings available in theMYTTOUCH.INI file, along with otheradvanced user notes.

Chapter 11 - Error Messages and Numberslists all internal errors, number references, andpossible solutions if these errors areexperienced.

Chapter 7. AdvancedUser Notes

Advanced User Notes &Information

The Advanced User Notes and TechnicalDocumentation covers a wide-range of topics& information. It is important to understandthat most users will simply type with thesoftware, so detailing all of the features,options, settings in the standard product helpwould overwhelm the majority of users.

Note: For up-to-date information, andother specific technical issues, it willalways be important to refer to the on-line

263

Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes

support database athttp://www.imgpresents.com/imgfaq.htm

If you have been referred to this section, orhave been unable to resolve your question(s) orproblems within this manual, on-line help, andtutorial, or are an advanced user familiar withWindows Initialization files (INI type files), theRegistry, and wish to learn all of theMy-T-Touch configuration Options, pleaseread the following chapters. For developers,integrators, or technicians, the followinginformation should be read in its entirety - alsorefer to the Developer’s Kit for even moreoptions & other advanced information.

Note: Some of the notes contained heredate back to the original development in1992. Certain information may be dated orno longer relevant, but is kept for historical

264


reasons and as a reference back to theactual implementation. This detail mayalso help answer questions about settingsand features, and why things have beendone in a particular manner.

Final Release NotesSpecific Application Notes & Releaseinformation are included in theAPPLICATION NOTES section below.

Quick Help is available only for the U.S.Standard 101 Keyboard.

Gaps in version numbers usually caused byOEM or non-public releases. List ischronological from original public release.

Version 1.30 - Product release 1/30/94265


Version 1.31 - Changes for Trident 256-colordrivers in Display routines & Macro PanelUpdates. 3/31/94

Version 1.32 - Modification to keyboardinterface DLL for compatibility with Windows95 August 24, 1995 release. 8/30/95

Version 1.35 - The INSTALL.EXE has beenremoved, and SETUP.EXE has an installationoption. Several minor inconsistencies havebeen corrected. 3/5/1996

Version 1.40 - Enhanced Graphics, 3 new sizes,complete compatibility & enhancements forWindows 95, multi-language versions, newmacro panels & features, and a whole lot more.3/1/97

Version 1.41 - WordComplete, Action Panel,Basic & Advanced Modes, and a wide range offeatures based on beta-test feedback.

My-T-Soft AT 7/1/1997266


Version 1.42 - 1.44 - Various minor changes toaccommodate CrossScanner compatibility -OnScreen / My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1997

Version 1.45 - Dwell timer added. OnScreen /My-T-Soft AT finalized & released.

My-T-Soft AT 9/15/1997

Version 1.45 - Enhancements for operationwithin Windows NT/2000. Incorporation offeatures from My-T-Touch, My-T-Pen,My-T-Soft AT. All basic operation confirmed.Issues with certain dialog edit fields, somewindow flash during typing, somedialogs/message boxes lose input focus, nologon support. 10/1/97

Version 1.46 - Various minor modifications. NoSplash Option, better operation with Menus,flexibility added for non-type into windows,default settings for common programsincluded. 12/9/97

267


Version 1.47 - Addition of NoType capabilityto bypass other floating windows, custom logoin operator mode, settings for Microsoft Office.7/15/98

Version 1.49 - Complete change for lower levelinterface into Windows, various new features,advanced macro support, released forintegrators only (pre formal 1.50 publicrelease). 4/9/1998

Version 1.50 - Numerous additions, Windows98 - My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1998

Version 1.50 - All features tested & verified,complete documentation update, all knownissues addressed, updated Developers Kit,addition of Logon Utilities. 11/1/1998

Version 1.52 - Maintenance release, match tocommercial products - My-T-Soft AT 5/2/1999

Version 1.53 - Maintenance release, match tocommercial products - My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1999

268


Version 1.60 - WinLogon options, e-commerceversion, 11/1/99

Version 1.61 - Maintenance release,AddFontResource removal, 2/1/2000

Version 1.67 - 3D Keys & infinite sizing,Incorporation of Windows 95/98 software tocreate retail version that allows install forWindows 95/98/Me/NT/2000, softwaredistribution on CD, updates from 1.61 versionsof My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. 7/16/2000

Version 1.70 - Integration & updates to Logonutilities for both 95/98/Me and NT/2000,integration with My-T-Soft TS (TerminalServer version), updated help, additionalkeyboard layouts Win 2000 specific features,modifications for non-mouse drivers.3/17/2001

Version 1.70 - OnScreen merged with 1.70code, added

269


WordList/TurnAwayScrlCrtl/Text-To-Speech.7/17/2001

Version 1.73 - OnScreen minor updates,changes to Text-To-Speech, integration withCrossScanner various maintenance updates,Terminal Server updates, etc. 3/17/2002

Version 1.75 - Various maintenance updates,new features to OnScreen, help updates,additional keyboards. 5/17/2002

Version 1.75a-1.75J - Several additionalsettings & customizations for OEMs.8/30/2002

Version 1.76 - Support for Build-A-Boardlayouts for both Windows Logon(IMGGINA2.DLL), and at run time(My-T-Soft TS), maintenance updates.11/17/2002

Version 1.77 - 104 key layouts, updates to 101layouts, additional Spanish/German/French

270


layouts, Chinese/Japanese/Korean layouts,customer requests & maintenance updates.7/7/2003

Version 1.78 - Support for Windows Vista, userconfiguration files, synchronization withOnScreen release, Build-A-Board layoutselection, Download Manager (managedupdates), keyboard scanning, keyboard layoutupdates, numerous customer requests andmaintenance updates. 4/18/2007

Version 1.78 Release 2 - Updates to keyboardscanning, maintenance updates, integrationwith Developer’s Kit 1.78 Release 3. 3/5/2008

Version 1.78 Release 3 - My-T-Soft TS andMy-T-Mouse releases, maintenance updates.7/16/2009

Version 1.78 Release 4 - Updates to OnScreenfor scanning requests, Settings Import/Export,Windows 7 compatibility 11/24/2009

271


Version 1.79 - MultiTouch support, Themes,Logon Windows 64-bit support, maintenanceupdates

Version 1.79 - 9/17/2012

Important User NotesMy-T-Touch WAS NOT intended to emulatethe Windows keyboard interface in its entirety.Although My-T-Touch appears to operate justas the keyboard does, due to its design, certainapplications may not function properly withMy-T-Touch. Special software considerationshave been made to make My-T-Touch asflexible as possible, and the notes below offerinformation on configuration settings that maymake My-T-Touch work within yourapplications. Also below is a completediscussion of settings, options, and possible

272


solutions to any incompatibilities.

My-T-Touch WAS intended to make certainoperations easier because the user canconcentrate on the task at hand, not whichinput device is required at the moment.

My-T-Touch allows the user to keep their eyeson the screen, so the flow of work on acomputer is uninterrupted. In essence,My-T-Touch is just a standard Windowsapplication that provides special functionality.

When asked "How do I do a right-click fromMy-T-Touch?" we try to be patient and explainthat My-T-Touch is a text input tool, and not apointing device. The touchscreen / peninterface replaces the desktop mouse as thepointing device, and My-T-Touch replaces thephysical keyboard. You need a pointing deviceto work with My-T-Touch, and if you can’tperform a right-click with your pointingdevice, you need to talk to the pointing device

273


vendor for options (or refer to IMG’sTouchRight Utilities(http://www.imgpresents.com/righttch/trt.htm)which provides right-click options & tools forpointing devices). Also note there are keyboardshort-cuts/options that can be used viaMy-T-Touch to possibly resolve the underlyingaccess issue - Shift-F10 will open the contextmenu (or the Properties key on the 104 layouts)which often is what people want when askingabout the right-click action. Finally, look at astandard physical keyboard, and find theright-click button - it isn’t there (unless thekeyboard has some sort of pointing devicecapability).

Technical NotesMy-T-Touch is a standard Windows

274


Application and does not require any specialdrivers, and should work with all keyboard andmouse emulation drivers that are compatiblewith the ones that ship with MicrosoftWindows.

For other pointing devices, My-T-Touch callsand uses the GetAsyncKeyState &GetKeyState API calls for certain actions ofthe mouse. These must be supported by thehardware & driver emulating the mouse. The1.40 release addresses some of theselimitations, and My-T-Touch operates properlywith Joystick-To-Mouse, CrossScanner, MouseKeys, and other pointing methods that do notuse the actual mouse driver.

When working with Virtual Machines, certainpointing device functions operate differentlybecause of the way the mouse integratesthrough the virtual machine layer. Somefunctions may not operate correctly, or the

275


virtual machine may need to be full screen (orwindowed) to operate correctly. We are awareof issues with the Windows API ClipCursorand SetMousePos when using VMWare andParallels virtual machines. These limitationsthen affects the keyboard scanning featurewhen running My-T-Touch in Windows withina virtual machine.

Application NotesTHE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIFICAPPLICATIONS IN WHICH My-T-TouchDOES

NOT NEED SPECIAL SETTINGS BUT INWHICH My-T-Touch REQUIRES

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION

276


Note: Because of the generalimprovement by Microsoft & otherWindows developers, this list has not beenupdated since the original releases. Itremains here as an appropriate place ifthere are any specific applications thatrequire additional notes when operatingwith My-T-Touch.

Dashboard for Windows

Publisher: Hewlett-Packard

Version: 2.0

Dashboard can cause some painting problemswhen My-T-Touch is

launched from a Layout due to the wayDashboard positions

opening windows. We suggest you setMy-T-Touch to open as a

277


Normal Window, and position Dashboard awayfrom the center of

the screen.

MS-DOS Window

Publisher: Microsoft

Version: Windows 3.0,3.1

My-T-Touch will not work with a Full ScreenDOS application.

My-T-Touch will work with a DOS applicationin a DOS Window.

There are a few items that should be notedwhen using My-T-Touch

with a DOS Window. You may want to use aPIF file for operating

a DOS Application in a DOS Window.

278


1. Keystroke Macros MUST BE ENTEREDIN LOWER CASE.

2. If the arrow or edit keys do not respondproperly, turn the Num Lock off.

Paintbrush, Solitaire, Reversi



The edit keys are used by these applications tomove the cursor.

Using the arrows, etc. on My-T-Touch willmove the Cursor onto the

Application, moving the cursor offMy-T-Touch, resulting in a very

short usefulness of My-T-Touch.

PC Tools for Windows

Publisher: Central Point

Version: 1.x, 2.0279


When My-T-Touch is minimized to a button,the My-T-Touch button

display can obscure some of the PC Toolswindows. Set

CaptionWatch=1 in the MYTTOUCH.INI fileto alleviate any

interference.

PIF Editor



If you have built an Application Short-Cut keywith the PIF

Editor, it will not respond in all cases to theShort-Cut if

typed on My-T-Touch.

Recorder

Publisher: Microsoft280



When working with My-T-Touch & Recorder -make sure that

My-T-Touch does not obscure any window youwill be working with

and you may NOT start a macro with akeyboard short-cut from

My-T-Touch.

Either start the macro from Recorder or try toremember where you

left your keyboard and use the keyboardshort-cut.

Windows Tutorial - (WINTUTOR.EXE)


Version: Windows 3.1

My-T-Touch hides behind the WindowsTutorial except in a few cases,

281


and these may be confusing to new users. Newusers should run the

tutorial without My-T-Touch, and learn theWindows Concepts before

using My-T-Touch.

Acrobat Reader (ACROREAD.EXE)

Publisher: Adobe

Version: All

When viewing documents as full screen,Acrobat will destroy the

Keyboard display on My-T-Touch. This is dueto improper windows

application operation within Acrobat. KeepMy-T-Touch minimized,

or do not use Acrobat in this fashion.

282


Windows Developers

Note: As a starting point, please refer tothe Install Developer’s Kit icon in theinstallation program group.

Developers Notes, downloadable files, samplecode, and other useful integration andprogramming information is available atInnovation Management Group, Inc.’s WebSite:http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm.(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm)

Developers wishing more technicalinformation about My-T-Touch, messaginginformation, and details how applications caninterface with My-T-Touch should contactInnovation Management Group, Inc.

283


For Questions or other information you maycontact:

Innovation Management Group, Inc.Customer Service179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 93446USA1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)+1-818-701-1579+1-818-936-0200 (fax)<[email protected]>http://www.imgpresents.com

About this productMy-T-Touch was conceived in its simplestform by Kermit Komm in a brainstormingsession at a company called Future

284


Technologies. The original name"My-T-Mouse" was a contraction of "MyTyping Mouse", and the original product wasdesigned as a mouse utility to enable a mouseto type and perform any operation within theGUI (Graphical User Interface) without theneed for a physical keyboard (this aspect of thedesign has become the underlying theme forthe acceptance of the products and theirtechnology in the marketplace).

Note: My-T-Mouse was originallyintroduced to the world at Fall COMDEX1993 (when COMDEX, i.e. the ComputerDealers Exposition, was the premier tradeshow for everything happening in thecomputer industry - My-T-Mouse wasfeatured as one of the highlights of theshow in a program called "ComputerChronicles" (a well known series that ranfrom 1981 through 2002). You can find thisarchived video [Computer Chronicles Fall

285


COMDEX 1993] at the Internet Archive(http://www.archive.org)).

Legal note: The My-T-Mouse name (andits resultant phonetic pronunciation)created a trademark dispute raised byViacom (with its cartoon character havinga similar sounding name), eventuallywinding up before the Trademark Trials &Appeals board and setting a citableprecedent, with Viacom’s opposition to theMy-T-Mouse® trademark being dismissed.

When introduced in 1993, the concept of anon-screen keyboard was new and far from themainstream, and in the beginning years mucheducation was required to explain "why"anyone would want or use an on-screenkeyboard. Over the years, with the introduction

286


of handheld devices, the growth of touchscreenbased systems, and the maturation ofpen-based systems, the concept of an on-screenkeyboard has become commonplace, and inmany situations, expected as an alternate inputmechanism.

Since the original product was named"My-T-Mouse", much effort was expended inexplaining that the product would work withtouchscreens or pen based systems (or, in fact,any pointing device that could act like amouse), so "My-T-Pen" and "My-T-Touch"were created to address the needs of themarketplace. In order to encompass the nowgrowing family of on-screen keyboards, thename "My-T-Soft" (i.e. My Typing Software)was created and eventually used as theencompassing trademark of the entireMy-T-Soft® family of on-screen keyboards andutilities. There is also a version enhanced for

287


people with specialized needs was originallynamed My-T-Soft AT (or My-T-Soft withAssistive Technology), and eventually renamedOnScreen to differentiate its capabilities withthe more commercially focused versions.

Conceived during the original development ofMy-T-Mouse, the concept of Build-A-Boardhas been under constant refinement anddevelopment during the entire lifetime ofMy-T-Mouse and its derivatives. At some pointin the future, Build-A-Board’s capabilities willbe expanded to enable not only completelycustomizable layouts, but to meet or exceed allof the capabilities of the original products andits derivatives.

Many of the enhancements and utilities camefrom all involved and My-T-Touch users.

In the 19 years as a commercial product, manyindividuals have been involved at variouslevels, and thanks & acknowledgements go to

288


everyone so involved.

Note: The following acknowledgementsare for the original release in 1993.

Production:

Product Concept, Screen Presentation &Usability: Irwin Handelman

Logo & Graphic Artwork & Fonts: MarcHandelman

Development:

Windows Interface & Keyboard Emulation:Kermit Komm

Keyboard Display & Display Interface: GeorgeMerritt

My-T-Touch Setup & Graphic Artwork & HelpFiles: Darrel Niemann

289


Manual & Help Information: Lorrie Greene

Customer SuggestionsWe appreciate and welcome suggestions fromour users for features that you would like to seein future versions of My-T-Touch. Please feelfree to send us any comments you may havethat would make our product more useful toyou. All suggestions and ideas become theproperty of Innovation Management Group,Inc.

Send to:

Innovation Management Group, Inc.Customer Service179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 93446USA

290


Or contact us directly:

1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)+1-818-701-1579+1-818-936-0200 (fax)<[email protected]>http://www.imgpresents.com

Date:_____________________

Name:__________________________________________

Address:________________________________________

City:_____________________State:_______Zip:_______

My-T-Touch Comments and Suggestions:

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

Version 1.79291


9/17/2012

Copyright © 1993-2012 by InnovationManagement Group, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.


292

Chapter 8. Files & FileNotes & InstallationInformation

This section outlines details about each file,minimum file requirements, and referenceinformation on the product installation.

My-T-Touch Files & FileNotes & InstallationInformation

MY-T-SOFT FILES & FILE NOTES

Files located in the My-T-Touch InstallationDirectory:

293

Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information

The following files are REQUIRED for properoperation of

My-T-Touch: (Version specific files indicated)

* - indicates the minimum files required forfunctional operation of My-T-Touch

** - the Font file is not absolutely necessary,depending on size & Font settings,

however for basic operation with minimal fileconfiguration, it is recommended that it remain.

- MYTTOUCH.EXE* - My-T-Touchexecutable

- MTTSETUP.EXE (???SETUP.EXE, Versionspecific) - My-T-Touch Setup executable

- MTTTUTOR.EXE (???TUTOR.EXE,Version specific) - My-T-Touch Tutorial &Calculator Tape Executable Tutorial &Calculator Tape cannot run at the same time.

294


- MYTLIB.DLL* - My-T-Touch DynamicLink Library

- MYTLIB32.DLL* - My-T-Touch DynamicLink Library

- IMGVERS.DLL* - IMG Dynamic LinkLibrary

- IMGLM.EXE (2000/XP/WS2003)(*Required for Terminal Server licensing)

- BWCC32.DLL* - Borland International Inc.’sDynamic Link Library

- CW3215.DLL* - Windows 32 supportDynamic Link Library

- IMGLOGON.DLL - (2000/XP) (*Requiredfor 2000/XP Logon) - IMG Logon DynamicLink Library In the 1.76 & later releases, theIMGLOGON.DLL is installed fromPKG00003.ZIP and extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

295


- IMGLOGON.EXE - IMG LogonConfiguration Utility (also used by???SETUP.EXE)

- IMGGINA2.DLL - (2000/XP) (*Required for2000/XP Logon, My-T-Touch 2 Keyboardlayout) - IMG Logon DLL In the 1.76 & laterreleases, the IMGGINA2.DLL is installed fromPKG00003.ZIP and extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

IMGGINA2.003 - (2000/XP) For support inWindows XP & Windows Server 2003, the fileIMGGINA2.003 is used. This overwritesIMGGINA2.DLL at install when installed onWindows XP or Windows Server 2003.

- IMGVistaLogon.DLL - (Vista/7) (*Requiredfor Vista / 7 Logon, My-T-Touch 2 Keyboardlayout) (this is analogous to theIMGGINA2.DLL for 2000/XP), but providesthe interface in Vista / 7 to allow the logonkeyboard.

296


The following files are used byIMGGINA2.DLL / IMGVistaLogon.DLL, andonly are used when My-T-Touch 2 is enabledas the logon option for 2000/XP

- MTS2.EXE - (My-T-Soft 2 executable todisplay LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF)

- MTSLIB.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /MYTSOFT2.EXE

- BABDLL.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /MYTSOFT.EXE, Build-A-Board commonfunctions

- STOCK.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /MYTSOFT2.EXE, Resources for 3D keys

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF - the KeyboardLayout for Logon (Created in Build-A-Board)

- LOGON\MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batchprocessor for MTS2.EXE

- LOGON\KEYBRD01.KMF - Default

297


Keyboard Macro File for MTS2.EXE

- LOGON\MAC00000.KMF - Default Macrosfor MTS.EXE

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML - Small layout(Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED - Mediumlayout (Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG - Large layout(Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG - Default layout(Original layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ZIP - Build-A-Boardlayout Project for Small keyboard

Note: The actual layouts are differentbetween 2000 / XP and Vista / 7

298


- LOGON\KBFLOGON.EXE - Utility tochange opening position forSmall/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layoutsIn the 1.76 & later releases, these support filesfor IMGGINA2.DLL are installed fromPKG00003.ZIP & extracted during install priorto Program Group creation.

- PNLWATCH.EXE / PWLIB.DLL - Utility &Support library to handle Tablet PC interfacefor Windows XP. In the 1.77 & later releases,these support files are installed fromPKG00003.ZIP & extracted during install priorto Program Group creation.

- MYTSOFT2.EXE - Executable forBuild-A-Board created keyboard layouts

- MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batch Processorfor MYTSOFT2.EXE In the 1.76 & laterreleases, MYTSOFT2.EXE,MACROBAT.EXE, and Support DLLs areinstalled from PKG00004.ZIP & extracted

299


during install prior to Program Group creation.

(1.76 add-on - IMGSOUND & default Wavefile)

- IMGSOUND.EXE - Executable process usedto play sounds

Note: In the Assistive Technology version,IMGSOUND.EXE is always run, even ifthere are no sound options turned on. Itcan be renamed or removed to prevent itfrom launching if sounds are not requiredand you do not want this process to be runbecause of memory or security reasons.Also see the NoAnnounce setting in theInitialization File Documentation. InCommercial versions, IMGSOUND.EXE isonly run when Sound=1.

- SOUNDS\KEYCLICK.WAV - Wave file fordefault KeyClick sounds (Sounds=1) In the

300


1.76 & later releases, IMGSOUND.EXE, andSOUNDS\KEYCLICK.WAV are installedfrom PKG00005.ZIP & extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

- HELP\*.html, HELP\IMAGES\*.png -My-T-Touch Help (PKG00008.ZIP)

- MTSOPEN.EXE - My-T-Touch Welcome

- SEETHRU.EXE (2000/XP - Transparency)Standalone window with dialog to controltransparency of keyboard

- KEYBOARD.KBF* - My-T-Touch KeyboardConfiguration & Description File

- *.KBF - other KBF files (pre-built sampleBuild-A-Board layouts included as examples)

- KEYBRD01.KMF - Base macro file,preserves original naming convention, used byboth MTS & MTS2. 1.77 note - significantname change KEYBRD?? changed to

301


KYBD???? to accommodate 104 layouts &future layout additions

- KYBD0001.KMF - KYBD????.KMF(*.KMF File specified in INI file (Keyboard=))- My-T-Touch Keyboard Layout & Macro Filefor individual Keyboards In the 1.76 & laterreleases, the KYBD0002.KMF -KYBD????.KMF files are installed asPKG00001.ZIP and extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

- MAC00000.KMF - MAC00???.KMF(*Appropriate files IF Macro panel in use) -My-T-Touch Macro Panel Files In the 1.76 &later releases, the MAC00001.KMF -MAC?????.KMF files are installed asPKG00002.ZIP and extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

- MYTTOUCH.INI* - My-T-TouchInitialization File

302


- LICENSE.EXE* - IMG License Manager

- LICENSE2.EXE* - IMG License verificationonly (read-only access)

- LICENSE.LIC* - IMG License File

- LICENSE.ORG - Original IMG License File

- LICENSE.TXT - IMG End User LicenseAgreement

- README.TXT - Product Installation text file

- MANIFEST.TXT - Reference File from Build

- IMGUTIL.EXE - used for installation anduninstallation of software

Support Files

- MYTSTORY.TXT - Tutorial Text file(PKG00006.ZIP)

- KEYBOARD.ORG - OriginalKEYBOARD.KBF file for recovery

303


- MYTTOUCH.ORG - OriginalMYTTOUCH.INI file for recovery

Developer Utilities: (Installed in InstallationDirectory)

- DEVKTDOC\DEVKIT.CHM - My-T-TouchUtilities & Information (PKG00006.ZIP)

- CTALTDEL.EXE - Dev Kit utility to restartWindows, used as an example for KeyLaunches - (pre 1.70 RESTRTWN.EXE, fromNTRSTART.EXE)

- DVKTINST.EXE - tool for quick installationof Developer’s Kit

- ZIP32.DLL - Zip library for compressingexports / Word Lists

- UNZIP32S.DLL - Unzip library, required forinstallation of Dev Kit with DVKTINST.EXE

- WORDLIST.EXE - Word List Assistant, readin files, save Word List files, install new Word

304


Lists, Requires ZIP32.DLL, UNZIP32S.DLL.This is also the utility that handles theExport/Import menu options, but only providesthe Word List Assistant in the OnScreenreleases.

- DKT??????.ZIP - latest release of DevelopersKit (If included with distribution files) UseDevKit Installer (DVKTINST.EXE), orWinZip or use PKUNZIP with the -d option topreserve directory (folder) structure.Recommended to Unzip in Installationdirectory for easier file management. The latestDeveloper’s Kit may be downloaded using theIMG Download Manager.

Note: The font and the files established in\Program Files\Common Files\InnovationManagement Group are not un-installedwhen My-T-Touch is un-installed. Theseremain in case future IMG products areinstalled. Refer to the IMG System

305


Manager for further information (ifavailable).

- MYTMOUSE.FON** - My-T-TouchKeyboard Font File for smaller sizes

- ADDFONT.EXE - Utility to Add font postinstallation, e.g. "Addfont add"

Located in the Windows System Directory (orWindows Fonts folder):

- MANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE - this is apost installation utility that establishes orupdates the IMG Download Manager and IMGLicense Manager files as outlined below.

Located in \Program Files\CommonFiles\Innovation ManagementGroup\Download Manager directory:

- IMGCLEAN.EXE - used to completeuninstall of software, required for Control

306


Panel Add/Remove Programs

- IMGDLM.EXE - The IMG DownloadManager - Installed byMANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE

- IMGNET.DLL - The IMG DownloadManager Library - Installed byMANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE

Located in \Program Files\CommonFiles\Innovation ManagementGroup\License Manager directory:

- LICENSE.DLL - library used by the IMGLicense Manager and IMG Download Manager

Files created during use:

- MYTTOUCH.BAK - My-T-Touch previousInitialization File (in configuration location foruser’s MYTTOUCH.INI file - see ConfigPathentry in Initialization File Documentation

OnScreen Add-Ons

307


- KEYBOARD.KB1* - Keyboard Layout forAction panel configuration

- A.TXT - Z.TXT,-.TXT, etc. - Word List files

- IMGSOUND.EXE* - Used for Key-ClickSounds and Text-To-Speech

- SCRLCTRL.EXE - Used for Screen Controlof larger than screen keyboard configurations

- TTSAPP.EXE - Speak and Setup forText-To-Speech, required to change voiceswhen using Text-To-Speech

- TURNAWAY.EXE - Head Mouse users Appto cover screen until Exit is clicked.

OnScreen Folders (The Developer’s Kit createsnumerous sub-folders - see Dev Kit docs)

SOUNDS - OnScreen Voice & Key-Clickreplacements

WORDLISTS - OnScreen Word Lists - savedand international

308


OnScreen with CrossScanner Add-Ons(CrossScanner folder)

- XSCAN.EXE - CrossScanner

- XSCAN_S.EXE - CrossScanner Setup

- XSCANSRV.EXE - CrossScanner Support

- KEYBOARD.KMF - CrossScanner Support

- MYTCLIB.DLL - CrossScanner Support

- XTOGGLE.EXE - CrossScanner Support -Separate executable for controllingCrossScanner

- XSCAN.INI - My-T-Touch Support -Configuration File for USB Device operation

- MANIFEST.TXT - My-T-Touch Support -Reference File from Build

- HELP\*.html, HELP\IMAGES\*.png -My-T-Touch Help

CrossScanner 4.00 additional files309


- XADMIN.EXE - My-T-Touch Support -Administrative setup forCrossScannerLogon.DLL

- CrossScannerLogon.dll - My-T-TouchSupport - Logon Interface DLL for WindowsVista / 7

- MTS2.EXE - My-T-Soft Executable -Keyboard for Logon Interface

- MTSLIB.DLL - Support for My-T-SoftExecutable

- BABDLL.DLL - Support for My-T-SoftExecutable

- STOCK.DLL - Support for My-T-SoftExecutable

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF - the KeyboardLayout for Logon (Created in Build-A-Board)

- LOGON\MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batchprocessor for MTS2.EXE

310


- LOGON\KEYBRD01.KMF - DefaultKeyboard Macro File for MTS2.EXE

- LOGON\MAC00000.KMF - Default Macrosfor MTS.EXE

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML - Small layout(Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED - Mediumlayout (Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG - Large layout(Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG - Default layout(Original layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ZIP - Build-A-Boardlayout Project for Small keyboard

- LOGON\KBFLOGON.EXE - MTS2.EXEUtility

Note that as files are removed, the possibilitiesfor errors or operational limitations increases.

311


Also note that a large portion of theMYTLIB.DLL are bitmaps that may not be inuse for particular fixed size configurations -contact IMG if a small footprint installation isrequired.

Note: The following notes indicate variousoptions for some of these files. There mayalso be additional information in AdvancedUser Notes, Operation Notes, and theInitialization File Documentation..

My-T-Touch Setup options: The???SETUP.EXE program can take a fewcommand line options. The command line"BUILD" is used when the top buttonMACRO is pressed on the Main Macropanel in My-T-Touch to automatically openSetup with the Build-A-Macro dialog.There also is a "HELPCMD" option to

312


display the internal help request prior tousing the HelpInterface function fromIMGVERS.DLL. This is currently used asthe lookup from the MYTTOUCH.INI file toopen the appropriate help file from theHELP folder. The lookup table approachwas required because Microsoft hasconstantly changed preferred help formatsthrough various versions of Windows. Helpis currently available in HTML files so thesame help files can be used in the productand be made available on the productwebsite.

Installation InformationCD/DVD may contain:

SETUP.EXE - Installation Assistant todetermine platform / install files

313


AUTORUN.INF - AutoRun for AutoPlayCD/DVD

RELEASE.TXT - Release information

Located on the My-T-Touch Distributionmedia:

Compressed Files of the My-T-TouchInstallation Files and:

README.TXT - For the Experienced User

LICENSE.TXT - My-T-Touch LicenseAgreement

SETUP.EXE - Setup Utility to InstallMy-T-Touch onto your Hard Drive

The IMG installer can support these options:

/? Displays a message box with info aboutoptions

/Q (Quiet install) runs a quiet install (nodialogs/user interaction)

314


/I (Install) runs a quiet install (no dialogs/userinteraction)

/U runs a quiet un-install (no dialogs/userinteraction)

/Q and /I are handled the same (customerrequested /Q)

OnScreen Add-ons

WordLists Folder - contains available WordLists

Speech Folder - Microsoft SpeechComponents, Text-To-Speech

The following information is for those userswho are curious and want to know, or wish toUninstall My-T-Touch & do not have theoriginal distribution media.

There are 2 approaches to Setup, an IMGinstaller and the Windows Installer (MSI). Thereason 2 installers are available is for flexibility

315


and support purposes. Installing any product isa relatively easy process, but can becomecomplicated as more & more features andcapabilities are included. In any complicatedsequential process, it is inevitable that somesequence or step is not handled properly. Byusing a second approach, a verifiablecomparison based mechanism is created wherea definitive end-result of files & settings can beattained, ensuring the integrity of theinstallation steps.

Post Installation information:IMGUTIL.EXE performs various postinstallation tasks. For reference, if theinstallation media has LICENSE.LIC in thesame folder as SETUP.EXE, or in the\LICENSE folder, IMGUTIL will copy thisinto the installation folder (this is useful forevaluation and other types of licensing). Ifthe installation media has aDK??????.ZIP file in the same folder as

316


SETUP.EXE, or in the \DEVKIT folder, itwill be copied to the installation folder.

For reference information, you can refer tothe INSTALL.XML used by the IMGSETUP.EXE for all post installationoperations. In Windows Installer (MSI)installs, these same actions occur.

SETUP.EXE will sense if My-T-Touch isInstalled or not. If My-T-Touch is not installed,then Install must be checked to Install theMy-T-Touch software. If My-T-Touch isalready installed, you may Un-Install byselecting the Un-Install option and selectingOK throughout the following screens.

The following outlines relevant informationabout the MSI (Microsoft Installer)packages, and command line options tomsiexec to manage installation with these

317


files

The MSI files are essentially databases ofinformation used by the Windows Installer toinstall the files and setup a system. Theexecutable to use is "msiexec.exe" and anyappropriate command line switches. In general,if you double click on an MSI file, Windowslaunches msiexec with the /i install option (e.g."msiexec /i prodver_target.msi").

For some basic, frequently asked for options,here are a few that can be used with thestandard IMG MSI install files (these switchesare not case sensitive):

In these examples, the msi file should bereplaced with the msi file you want to operateon

msiexec /i mts178_2000xp.msi (This installsMy-T-Soft 1.78 (using the user interface))

msiexec /i /qn mts178_2000xp.msi (This318


silently installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO userinterface))

msiexec /x /qn mts178_2000xp.msi (Thissilently un-installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NOuser interface))

msiexec /a mts178_2000xp.msi /qnTARGETDIR="C:\Documents andSettings\Full User\Desktop\Test" (This silentlyinstalls My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO userinterface) to a different target directory (fortesting, etc.))

Further notes on command line switches:

/a = Administrative install - allows use ofTARGETDIR override

/i = standard install

/x = standard un-install

/q? = user interface options

/qn = Displays no user interface.319


/qb = Displays a basic user interface.

/qr = Displays a reduced user interface with amodal dialog box displayed at the end of theinstallation.

/qf = Displays the full user interface with amodal dialog box displayed at the end.

/qn+ = Displays no user interface, except for amodal dialog box displayed at the end.

/qb+ = Displays a basic user interface with amodal dialog box displayed at the end.

/qb- = Displays a basic user interface with nomodal dialog boxes.

For further info on msiexec.exe, refer toMicrosoft’s documentation.

320


Deployment InformationThis section outlines relevant information ifMy-T-Touch is going to be imaged via harddisk replication, incorporated into a differentinstallation package, or handled externallyfrom the publically provided installationapproaches. Please refer to the other sections inthis chapter to have a basic level ofunderstanding regarding the files and issuesinvolved in the installation of My-T-Touch

This is a quick summary of the 3 stepstypically used to prepare a master image -for more details and reference information,see below

1. Install the software. It is recommendedyou do not run the software until after theduplication.

2. Copy in custom configuration (if

321


necessary). If configured on a separatesystem, refer to My-T-Touch Setup | Filemenu | Show Config File Location forlocation of configuration files.

3. Copy in company/site/deployment license(if applicable) - replace LICENSE.LIC inInstallation folder.

There are 3 main areas that need to bemanaged: Deployment, Default Configuration,and Licensing

Deployment

The goal of this step is to ensure that all therequired files are on the target system. Forpractical purposes, these are simply all the filesand folders in the Installation folder, e.g.\Program Files\MYTTOUCH. Often, thedefault installation method can be used, withpost installation management of configurationand license details handled after the

322


installation.

When Imaging, the basic approach is to installthe software onto the master system, thenperform any updates to configuration andlicense files, and then DO NOT RUN thesoftware (as settings and files can be modifiedby running the software).

For actual installation (i.e. including thesoftware with an existing application), it is bestto wrap the files into the existing applicationinstallation approach. Refer to the Zip files inthe extended download area, as these are theinstallation files without any installationadd-ons - these are just the program files thatneed to be installed on a system in acompressed, single file zip format. Often it iseasiest to have a test system where normalinstallation / testing can take place, and refer tothe information here, the post installation fileson the test system, and also the

323


MANIFEST.TXT text file (a post-buildsnapshot of the product files) in the installationfolder for file details.

Doing folder comparisons, or simply testing onthe target system (after imaging/installation), isthe preferred approach to ensure the softwarehas been deployed correctly.

Default Configuration

The configuration is contained in theKEYBOARD.KBF / MYTTOUCH.INI files(and the MAC*.KMF files if the macro panelsare used). Typically making sure the desired(correctly configured) files are the files in theinstallation folder is all that is necessary tobring a new/different default configurationwhen the software is run.

The simplest steps to create the desiredconfiguration files are to configure the softwareas desired, then use the menu to Save Current

324


Settings, and also Save Position. To test,re-start the software and verify theconfiguration is correct. Then obtain theKEYBOARD.KBF / MYTTOUCH.INI file(refer to the ConfigPath setting / or use Setup |File menu | Show Config File Location), anduse these on your master image or as part ofthe installation files.

After duplication, when a new user runs thesoftware, they will receive a copy of thesedefault configuration files from the InstallationFolder. They will then have their own personalcopy which can be configured as they desire.This is the default setting of the software(ConfigPath=1). Note there are differentapproaches that could be taken with theseconfiguration files based on the ConfigPathsetting and permissions - for example, a fixedconfiguration for all users that cannot bemodified.

325


Note: If secure logon is required, theLogon Utilities require a registry entry inthe WinLogon group, which is notmanaged by installation or via theconfiguration files. This option requiresproper configuration via the Logon Utilities.

Licensing

If using the default (retail) license scheme, youjust need to ensure that the file LICENSE.LICin the installation folder is the same asLICENSE.ORG (the as shipped license file). Ifusing any other type of license, refer to notesand instructions that were provided to you. Inmost cases, this means that you will have beenprovided a custom LICENSE.LIC file, and thismust be the file installed as LICENSE.LIC.

326

Chapter 9. OperationNotes

My-T-Touch Operation andRelease Notes

These notes document some of the knownlimitations with My-T-Touch as of this release,and other anecdotal information.

EGA UsersThe My-T-Touch Tutorial will not run in EGA,although the rest of My-T-Touch will. EGAusers will probably prefer different settings for

327

Chapter 9. Operation Notes

the default colors, since the light gray is adithered gray on the EGA display.

Year 2038 LimitationsIn versions 1.78 and later, any invalid date istreated as a 0 result and time and dates will notbe displayed in the System Information panelproperly when run past the year 2037. Allimportant functionality of My-T-Touch is notaffected by the date, and beyond the improperdisplay on the System Information panel, thereare no other limitations associated with anydate issue. Note that versions 1.77 and earlierwill not run when the system date is greaterthan the year 2037 (due to an invalid/nullpointer returned by the time system call).Search the internet for the "Year 2038"problem for further information. Future

328


versions will update to a more capable systemtime call well before the year 2037.

Windows Menus

1. The My-T-Touch Menu does not have anykeyboard short-cuts - My-T-Touch wasdesigned to operate entirely from apointing device.

2. For Keyboard users who want to closeMy-T-Touch, make sure the Cursor is notover the My-T-Touch display, then UseAlt-Tab to select the My-T-Touch window,and use Alt-Space to bring up theMy-T-Touch Menu for My-T-Touch, thenarrow down to select Close.

3. Keyboard Users can Minimize

329


My-T-Touch by doing the above &selecting a Minimize option.

4. If a Any Windows Menu is up in anapplication, the following limitationsaffect My-T-Touch: You Cannot MoveMy-T-Touch, or if you do, the Menu willclose. Assignments to Middle & Rightbuttons will not work! Cannot movethrough System Menu Bar Highlight ifthere are no Pop-up menus.

Keyboard NotesThe Print Screen key only captures the ActiveApplication. Maximize the Active application,then use the Print Screen Key to capture a fullscreen of the display.

The Pause Key properly generates the

330


keystrokes, and sends them to the activeapplication - the application must respond tothese keystrokes for any action or pause tooccur.

The Ctrl-Break, Ctrl-Alt-Del, and Sys-RqCombinations are not supported. However, byassigning executables to the appropriate key,certain emulations can occur. As an example,the default install includes a sample ofemulating the Ctrl-Alt-Del sequence to restartWindows.

The Alt-Tab combination works properly, but ifused from My-T-Touch the user will find thatonly the "top" 2 windows cycle. This is causedby the way Windows re-sorts windows in theWindow Manager list. The "quick-switch /select" window is not visible when the Alt-Tabcombination is generated by My-T-Touch.Some tricks can be used by creating macroswith Alt-Tab-Tab, or Alt-Tab-Tab-Tab, since

331


these will select windows deeper down the list.For example, Alt-Tab-Tab from a macro panelwill cycle through the top 3 windows in the list.

Using the Shift-F10 combo to bring upproperty & context menus operates correctly,but additional keyboard functionality is notavailable when these menus are open.

DOS Windows must operate within the "tty"class within windows, and if you have troubleusing the arrow or edit keys in a DOS Window,try turning the Num-Lock off.

Some combo boxes and password entry dialogsdo not accept keystrokes and appear to losefocus. This is because of internal operation ofthe Windows operating system and certainsecurity measures enforced to prevent"software" from comprimising the security ofpasswords, etc. Contact IMG for additionaloptions available to resolve any mission criticalrequirements.

332


KMF layouts, Windows Regional Settings,Windows Keyboard Layouts, etc. At firstglance, it would seem that a keyboard is prettystraightforward, and in most cases, it is.However, differences in physical keyboards &physical keyboard layouts, changes to thecomputer keyboard over time & differentmanufacturer approaches, along withinternational/cultural requirements, has turnedkeyboard handling into quite a complicatedaffair. In order to isolate differences betweendifferent versions of Windows, expectations ofoperation, and other issues, each supportedlayout is contained in a KMF (KeyboardMacro File). In general, these are intended tobe used in the region & with the appropriateversion of Windows.

While people do not complain that theirphysical keyboard does not change to matchthe symbols generated, when using a virtual

333


keyboard, this type of operation is expected.The key labels are also contained within theKMF file, and My-T-Touch will display the keylabels for what is generated from theappropriate Windows Keyboard Layout. If youare experiencing inconsistencies between whatis displayed and what is typed, then it isprobably related to the selected Windowskeyboard layout (see Control Panel |Keyboard). This is handled differently indifferent versions of Windows (not onlyplatforms, but international releases).

KMFs & KBFs & Build-A-Board

The original design used a KBF (KeyBoardFile) to track the physical appearance (keys,panels, size, etc.) (i.e. imagine a blankkeyboard), and a KMF (Keyboard Macro File)to track key labels & key operation. This workswell when a pure physical keyboard emulationapproach is used, since each KMF will result in

334


the display of different labels, but the relativeappearance of the shape & size & keyrelationships remains the same. For example, ifyou place physical keyboards from differentcountries next to each other, they will lookpretty much the same except for the key labels.

When Build-A-Board was designed, acompletely different approach was used,wherein each layout file would containeverything necessary in a single file, the KBF(KeyBoard File). So KBF files greater than2.00 not only contain keys, panels, & sizeinformation, but also key labels & keyoperation information.

Build-A-Macro NotesThe following double-characters are reservedin Build-A-Macro:

335


@@ - Signifies an Alt keystroke to follow

e.g. @@f = [Alt-Down]f[Alt-Up]

~~ - Signifies a Ctrl keystroke to follow

^^ - Signifies a Shift keystroke to follow

$$ - used internally for internal macro uses

%% - used to specify a virtual key, or akeyboard scan code

You may not use these character combinationsin your macros, unless you use them asoutlined. For example, you may quickly createa macro for File, New ([Alt]-F, N) by entering"@@fn" and clicking OK. However, using theReserved words in brackets is the preferredmethod.

The %% sequence has 3 options, and must beformed properly to be interpreted as an specialentry. 4 characters must follow the 2 percentsigns, spaces are not allowed. When this is

336


used, it generates both the Down and Upkeyboard messages, (press & release), similarto the entry of a specific character.

The following general form is:

%%cnnn

where c is a character signifying Keystroke orScancode or Virtual Key Code - The only validcharacters are k or s or v (case does not matter)

The nnn must be 3 decimal digits (valuesbetween 000 and 999 are valid). Note that thereare only 200+ keys on the panels and 255Virtual keys - higher numbers may causememory access errors!

The keystroke (k) numbers refer to the internalnumbering of the keyboard - see below for atable of the standard 101 keyboard.

For example, to generate a F10 keystroke, youmay use "%%k010" in the Build-A-Macro

337


portion. In most cases, using the actualcharacter will generate the appropriate scancodes internally, and this is only provided as anenhancement to provide more functionality incertain environments. Documented deficienciesinclude lack of support for the keys on theNumeric keypad panel. Additionally, by usingthe scancodes, macros can generate"keystrokes" for keys that are not present onthe physical keyboard. Because of thehardware oriented nature of the actualscancode generated by the physical keyboard,and its interpretation by the system hardwareand Windows, the scope of these issuesrequires that they be referenced in appropriatesystem manuals, and/or documentation onindustry standards.

The Virtual Key (v) passes the Windows basedVirtual key code directly through My-T-Touch.How an application interprets the virtual key

338


code is dependent on regional, language,keyboard layout, and possibly other issues.

Quick Reference:

%%knnn, e.g. %%k010 - uses the currentlyselected KMF (My-T-Touch layout) and looksup the virtual key / scan code information forthis key, sends down/up keystrokes

%%snnn, e.g. %%s112 - sends the scancode,but processed internally. In most cases this willbe the same virtual key code as specified, but itmay be modified.

%%vnnn, e.g. %%v112 - sends the WindowsVirtual Key (refer to Microsoft documentation)unmodified (note decimal notation, hex is notsupported).

Key# Description

0 Escape Key

1 F1

339


2 F2

3 F3

4 F4

5 F5

6 F6

7 F7

8 F8

9 F9

10 F10

11 F11

12 F12

13 Select key

14 1/!

15 2/@

16 3/#

340


17 4/$

18 5/%

19 6/^

20 7/&

21 8/*

22 9/(

23 0/)

24 -/_

25 =/+

26 Back space

27 Tab

28 Q

29 W

30 E

31 R

341


32 T

33 Y

34 U

35 I

36 O

37 P

38 [/{

39 ]/}

40 Caps Lock

41 A

42 S

43 D

44 F

45 G

46 H

342


47 J

48 K

49 L

50 ;/:

51 ’/"

52 Enter Key

53 Enter Key - make both waves 52.WAV &53.WAV

54 Shift / Left Shift

55 Z

56 X

57 C

58 V

59 B

60 N

343


61 M

62 ,/<

63 ./>

64 //?

65 Shift / Right Shift

66 \/|

67 Control / Left Control

68 Alt / Left Alt

69 Space Bar

70 Alt / Right Alt / Alt-Gr


These are on the edit panel

72 Print Screen

73 Scroll Lock

74 Pause

344


75 Insert

76 Home

77 Page Up

78 Delete

79 End

80 Page Down

81 Up Arrow

82 Left Arrow

83 Down Arrow

84 Right Arrow

These are on the Numeric keypad panel

85 CL indicator / not processed as key

86 NL indicator / not processed as key

87 SL indicator / not processed as key

88 Num Lock

345


89 /

90 *

91 -

92 7

93 8

94 9

95 +

96 4

97 5

98 6

99 1

100 2

101 3

102 Enter / =

103 0

346


104 decimal point

MemoryMy-T-Touch uses Windows Global Memoryfor various things. My-T-Touch will operatefaster if Global memory is physical systemmemory, and not swapped to disk as virtualmemory. Although My-T-Touch will run in 2MB systems, operating at 4 MB, 8 MB, orhigher is recommended.

It is normal for the My-T-Touch SystemInformation Mem:????K display to drop as youtype on My-T-Touch, or move over theMy-T-Touch display. You may also noteSystem Resources change as My-T-Touch isused.

347


Command Line OptionsQuick Reference (Command line options)

• -NoSplash [Open without splash screen]

• !Minimize [Open in the as configuredminimized state]

• DEFERSKIPMSG [If this is found in thecommand line, it only affects the secondinstance - the default actions will occur, butno message (no dialog/MessageBox) will beshown (see below for notes/details)]

• DEFERNOACTION [If this is found in thecommand line, it only affects the secondinstance - nothing will occur when the EXEis launched - the second EXE will just closeitself (see below for notes/details)]

• /k=mynew.kbf [Override KeyBoard File(must be in Config Path location)]

348


• /i=mynew.ini [Override Initialization File(must be in Config Path location)]

• x=123[%] [Override opening x screenposition, add % to use screen percentages(calculated)]

• y=321[%] [Override opening y screenposition, add % to use screen percentages(calculated)]

Prior to Version 1.76, the only command lineoption was the ability to specify the NoSplashsetting - see NoSplash in the Iniitialization filedescription. [Path]\MYTTOUCH.EXE-NoSplash In the implementation, the - (dash)is actually the trigger, and the notes specifyNoSplash only as a description so maintainerscan understand what the command line means -it is not required, and in fact, can be anythingas long as there is a - (dash).

In the 1.79 release, a command line based

349


"Open in the minimized state" has been added.Prior to this, the shortcut link propertiesneeded to be modified to indicate the "Run:"state as Minimized (instead of Normal Window(or Maximized)). This is implemented similarto the -NoSplash and can be used as !Minimizeor Minimized! - the exclamation pointcharacter is the trigger, and if it is present, theinternal operation will match the ShowWindow properties from the shortcut link. It isrecommended you include the text ofMinimize or Minimized for future maintainers.

Important: In the 1.78 release, theConfigPath setting determines the defaultlocation for the user’s configuration file.These notes apply to this location. Forexample, if you are specifying a differentlayout, it must reside in the user’s specificpath, if ConfigPath=1 (default) is set in theInitialization file. See ConfigPath setting inthe Initialization file for further details on

350


location You may also reference theconfiguration files location from the Filemenu in My-T-Touch Setup

DEFER overrides - DEFERSKIPMSG &DEFERNOACTION: In 1.79, 2 newDEFER overrides have been added tochange the operation of the secondinstance of the EXE when launched. Withno option, the default action is to find theexisting Window, restore from minimizedstate (if in a minimized state), position thekeyboard window at the center bottom ofthe screen, and display a messageindicating only one process (window) canbe running. For situations where thismessage, or these actions areundesirable, one of these 2 options can beincluded in the shortcut’s command line,and change these actions. IfDEFERSKIPMSG is included in the

351


command line, all actions will occur, butthe final dialog (MessageBox) will NOT beshown. The second instance willopen/position the running software, andthen close. If DEFERNOACTION isincluded in the command line, the secondinstance will perform no actions, andsimply close. Running a second instanceof the EXE with the DEFERNOACTIONoption will result in no feedback to theuser.

In the 1.76 release, in addition to the-NoSplash code, there is support for a /k=[file]and/or a /i=[file]. These provide an override tothe default KEYBOARD.KBF (/k) andMYTTOUCH.INI (/i).

There should be no spaces in the command lineentry, except to separate multiple entries.

(e.g. C:\Program352


Files\MYTTOUCH\MYTTOUCH.EXE/k=mykbf.kbf /i=mykbf.ini -NoSplash)

The [file] specified must reside in the currentconfiguration folder, as specified by theConfigPath setting in the Initialization File(except in Terminal Server version).

The code checks for both upper & lowercase k(K) and i (I). The trigger is the = (equal) sign,and the code looks to the previous character forthe k or i, and the following characters up untila space or end of line for the [file].

The /k option updates the KEYBOARD.KBFfile with the specified [file]. There is no errorchecking to guarantee the file exists, or that itis a valid KBF file, so care should be usedwhen implementing these options. The [file]specified with the /k option MUST be a copyof a previously saved configuration (i.e. copyKEYBOARD.KBF to MYKBF.KBF). ABuild-A-Board 2.10 generated KBF file may

353


also be used.

The /i option references the given [file] forconfiguration information, instead of thedefault MYTTOUCH.INI, allowing differentsettings to be used.

The implementation of the 2 options isinternally different (because of internaldesign). The /k option for My-T-Touch actuallycopies the specified [file] toKEYBOARD.KBF, then continues on asnormal. The /i option internally references thespecified [file], leaving the defaultMYTTOUCH.INI file intact.

In order to ensure proper operation, certainsettings (panels, colors, etc.) are written to theINI file when the /k option is used. This is doneto ensure a match between the layoutinformation, and the details in the INI file.When the /k override in the command line isused, the following occurs:

354


• The specified [file] is copied toKEYBOARD.KBF

• If only the /k option is used, overlappingfeatures from the specified configuration[file] are written to the MYTTOUCH.INI.

• if both /k and /i options are used, the INIsettings will be used. Therefore, a "matched"pair should be used whenever both optionsare specified.

• If the /k is used, any other "launch" shouldprobably also require the /k option to ensurethe desired layout appears.

A "matched" pair means saving both Settingsand Position, then closing My-T-Touch. Copythe KEYBOARD.KBF to MYNEW.CFG, andMYTTOUCH.INI To MYNEW.INI.

Additional Implementation Notes: Thecommand line overrides will use the

355


current configuration location - seeMy-T-Touch Setup | File menu | ShowConfig File Location to identify the currentuser configuration file location. Customfiles need to be in this location. The/i=mynew.ini INI override has a quirk -because of internal backup code, thecustom named INI should be in theprogram files location, i.e. \ProgramFiles\MYTTOUCH. For ease of use, youcan duplicate files in both locations. Oftenif there are no specific INI settings thataffect operation, and the primarymotivation is to use a different layout, it iseasiest to only specify the KBF, e.g./k=mynew.kbf (the KBF must be in theConfig File Location).

Terminal Server Note: In the TerminalServer version, the file must reside in thecurrent user’s folder.

356


In the 1.77 release, an X/Y coordinate can alsobe used, e.g X:200 Y:300 (e.g. C:\ProgramFiles\MYTTOUCH\MYTTOUCH.EXE-NoSplash x:200 y:300)

The implementation looks for either the :(colon) character, or the = (equal sign), andlooks at both upper or lower case x (X), y (Y).So X=200 and Y=300 will also be recognized.Negative numbers can be used. There shouldbe no spaces in the command line except toseparate options.

In the 1.78 Release 2, a percent sign charactercan be used to position the X/Y coordinatesbased on the relative position specified (percentof total screen resolution), rather than a fixedlocation, e.g. x:34% y:70%.

The implementation requires the % characterto immediately follow the numeric value. Valid

357


values for X/Y must be in the range 0-100 -negative numbers or numbers over a 100 willrevert to acceptable values. The calculationincludes the size of the keyboard window, andwill keep the entire window visible, so it is adynamic calculation based on the specifiedpercent, the screen resolution, and the currentsize of the window. Some examples:[C:\ProgramFiles\MYTTOUCH\MYTTOUCH.EXE x:20%y:75%], or [C:\ProgramFiles\MYTTOUCH\MYTTOUCH.EXE-NoSplash x=75% y=50%].

Note: When opening in the minimizedstate with the minimize option as aWindow (Floating Window), these X/Ycommand line overrides will be applied tothe floating window. Refer toButtonOverrideW/H andButtonOverrideX/Y for additional control

358


options specific to the floating windowminimize option at startup.

Troubleshooting / Diagnosing Startup

In the 1.78 Release 2, "STARTDEBUG" can beused as the command line to display to thescreen key code points during the initializationof the software. During the program startup,there is a direct to display "Reached CodeMarker ID" code indication. As the codeprogress and reaches key points in the startupsequence, a code marker (e.g. 1003) is reached,and using a direct to display debugging feature,the code marker is directly displayed on the leftside of the system display. If there is an erroror other problem starting, the last code markerdisplay will help indicate where the codestopped, and what it was doing.

The following is the list of the codes and what359


has happened up to that point:

• 1001 In WinMain code, no system callsmade yet

• 1002 After check for Window alreadyexisting (Previous Instance)

• 1003 After Class Registered with system(Register Class) Pre Window Creation

• 1004 After Window created

• 1005 Free System Timer verified, internalvariables initialized

• 1006 DLL’s attached

• 1007 Macro file verified / loaded, Read fromINI

• 1008 If Win Logon, IMGSERV.EXElaunched (95/98/Me) - post launch (Codeafter OpenFirst=1 drop-out)

• 1009 Several system calls completed360


• 1010 After Keyboard Layout read in /prepare for paint

• 1011 System Timer set - last spot beforepaint

• 1012 After paint, pre System hooks(95/98/M3/NT)

• 1013 After System hooks set (95/98/M3/NT)

• 1014 Final call to DLL’s, last spot beforemessage loop

• 1015 After message loop, before all internalcleanup

There are also several "critical error" spots thatcan be tested easily (refer to ConfigPath settingto ensure you are working with correct filelocation!)

1) Rename MAC00000.KMF to somethingelse (KM, BAK, etc.)

361


Run My-T-Touch - it will stop after 1006 andreturn false in WinMain

2) Rename MYTTOUCH.INI to somethingelse (IN, HLD, etc.)


3) Rename KEYBOARD.KBF to somethingelse (KB, HLD, etc.)


Note: A normal startup will show through1014 (and not show 1015 unless you closethe software). Setting ClassWatch &WindowWatch in the INI file will identify ifmessage loop is reached, and that theprocess is acting normally (outside ofactual window display). When this settingis enabled, the results will be shown onthe top lines of the screen.

362


As a separate reference, these details wereasked by a customer doing custom integrationwork, and the following is a generalized flowof the startup & important events when theexecutable is started.

• Opening Check - should MTSOPEN.EXE berun (reference OpenFirst settings in INI file)

• Verify MYTLIB.DLL (Existence,LoadLibrary)

• Register Window Class (RegisterClassEx)

• Create Windows (CreateWindowEx)

• Verify System Timer Available

• Initialize variables, global memory, files, etc.

• Interface Libraries (LoadLibrary)

• INI File

363


• Keyboard Configuration file

• Show/Update window (splash window - seeNote below)

• Message Loop

Splash Window Note (Windowpainting/WM_PAINT): The NoSplashsetting in the INI file or command line-NoSplash can be used for removingsplash. The splash processing is an addedsequence prior to normal painting.

Build-A-Board SupportThe 1.76 and newer versions now support KBFfiles (KeyBoard Files) from IMG’sBuild-A-Board 2.10 or later.

364


The following notes some of the issues on howthis is implemented.

The KEYBOARD.KBF file is the KeyboardLayout file, and it determines which programwill be used to display & operate the layout.For KBF files built by Build-A-Board,MYTSOFT2.EXE will be used. For the defaultKEYBOARD.KBF, MYTTOUCH.EXE will beused. When MYTSOFT2.EXE is used, theMYTTOUCH.INI file is not referenced at all.These are the key issues to be aware of whensetting up which keyboard layout / programeach user will be presented:

There is no specific way to retrieve the layoutsbuilt by Build-A-Board into the My-T-Touchfolder. Build-A-Board should be installed on adevelopment workstation or stand-alonesystem. Once the required layout(s) are built,these may be copied from the \ProgramFiles\Build-A-Board\Target\[Project] folder,

365


where [Project] is the name of theBuild-A-Board Project for the specificlayout(s).

Note that the shortcut can be used to launch aspecific layout specified via the command line,

e.g. C:\ProgramFiles\MYTTOUCH\MYTTOUCH.EXE/k=NUMERIC.KBF, or

C:\ProgramFiles\MYTTOUCH\MYTTOUCH.EXE/k=KEYBOARD.NUM.

The specified file MUST be in same folder asthe EXE.

When MYTTOUCH.EXE is run, if theKEYBOARD.KBF file (or specified file via thecommand line /k=[Keyboard Layout]) is forMYTSOFT2.EXE, MYTTOUCH.EXE willterminate, and launch MYTSOFT2.EXE.

366


The license for MYTSOFT2.EXE is the sameas for My-T-Touch.

Refer to the Administrator Notes in the IMGLicense Manager for differences in theTerminal Server version.

My-T-Touch Button DisplayMy-T-Touch uses only three graphical icons onits buttons, the rest consist only of text. Twoimportant points must be made about this:

1. It was our intention to make My-T-Toucheasy to use for all levels of computer users.Due to the sizing concerns of My-T-Touch,and the inherent problems of shrinking andgrowing graphical images, dealing onlywith text was the most reasonable solution.

367


2. Even though a picture may be worth athousand words, in most cases forMy-T-Touch, one will do. Also, to finalizeour point, just sit in front of an unfamiliarapplication with a graphical button bar,and quickly discern what each button does.

Hopefully, with Quick Help and the buttonname, a new user to My-T-Touch can learn thefunction of each button quickly.

Finally, since the user can build Panels,imagine the amount of extra effort required tobuild a graphical icon for each macro...

Stay tuned for Build-A-Board!

My-T-Touch Setup |

368


Configuration | SpecialTo properly operate the Special Settingsaccessible at the My-T-Touch Special HandlingScreen, you must read the details about theInitialization file below. Primarily this screenand its options are intended for advanced userswho are already familiar enough withWindows and its concepts. The settingsavailable here allow for the customization ofMy-T-Touch without the need to edit theMyTSpcl???? settings in the Initialization file.

To Add a new Window Name to the list, typethe new name, and press Enter. Then select theMy-T-Touch action on the right.

To Delete an existing Window Name, Press theDelete Key and the Press Enter.

You may return to the default settings forMyTSpcl by pressing

369


the Return to Default button.

You may edit the Initialization file by clickingon the "Edit" button.

You may return to the Installation defaults byclicking on the Return to Installation Defaultsbutton. (This will copy the MYTTOUCH.ORGfile from the My-T-Touch InstallationDirectory to the Windows Directory.) If you dothis, we suggest you exit My-T-Touch andrestart.

Windows NotesTablet PC (Windows Vista / 7)

The Tablet PC Input Panel interface used inWindows XP is not available in Windows Vista/ 7. My-T-Touch can be used in conjunctionwith the various Tablet PC Input Panel options

370


available within Windows Vista / 7.

Fast User Switching (Windows XP)

Upon a switch from or to a user session, thesoftware reacts to theWM_WTSSESSION_CHANGE message byverifying the software is not minimized, andrestoring setup from the saved configuration.See the SessionChangeEnabled setting in theInitialization file.

Korean Windows, default IME (WindowsXP)

The IME creates a VK_PROCESSKEY /WM_KEYUP message when the pointingdevice does a ?BUTTONUP event, causingproblems with the building of characters fromthe Korean layout.

371


Sounds (Advanced Notes)External Wave File Integration

Version Specific Notes: If Sounds=1 orSounds=2 is set in the commercialversions (i.e. non-Assistive Technologyversion), the following details files andnaming requirements.

For foreign or custom keyboards and otheruses, My-T-Touch allows the user to replacethe pre-recorded voice descriptions of the keys.

To add your own wave file, simply record thedescription required, and then place the wavefile into the installation directory in the Soundsfolder (directory) (Default C:\ProgramFiles\MYTTOUCH\SOUNDS) according tothe following convention:

372


Each numbered key description should have awave file

associated with the naming convention - Key 0,the Escape

key, would be "0.WAV" - Key 1, the F1 key,would be "1.WAV"

and so on up to "100.WAV", etc.

In other words, if there is a "0.WAV" file in theSounds folder, and

Voices is the selected Sounds option, then the"0.WAV" file

will be played whenever the Escape key ispressed on My-T-Touch.

If the Sound option is Key-Click and there is a"KEYCLICK.WAV" in

the Sounds folder, then this wave will beplayed whenever a key on

373


My-T-Touch is pressed.

Key# Description

0 Escape Key

1 F1

2 F2

3 F3

4 F4

5 F5

6 F6

7 F7

8 F8

9 F9

10 F10

11 F11

12 F12

374


13 Select key

14 1/!

15 2/@

16 3/#

17 4/$

18 5/%

19 6/^

20 7/&

21 8/*

22 9/(

23 0/)

24 -/_

25 =/+

26 Back space

27 Tab

375


28 Q

29 W

30 E

31 R

32 T

33 Y

34 U

35 I

36 O

37 P

38 [/{

39 ]/}

40 Caps Lock

41 A

42 S

376


43 D

44 F

45 G

46 H

47 J

48 K

49 L

50 ;/:

51 ’/"

52 Enter Key

53 Enter Key - make both waves 52.WAV &53.WAV

54 Shift / Left Shift

55 Z

56 X

377


57 C

58 V

59 B

60 N

61 M

62 ,/<

63 ./>

64 //?

65 Shift / Right Shift

66 \/|


68 Alt / Left Alt

69 Space Bar

70 Alt / Right Alt / Alt-Gr


378


These are on the edit panel

72 Print Screen

73 Scroll Lock

74 Pause

75 Insert

76 Home

77 Page Up

78 Delete

79 End

80 Page Down

81 Up Arrow

82 Left Arrow

83 Down Arrow

84 Right Arrow

These are on the Numeric keypad panel

379


85 CL indicator / not processed as key

86 NL indicator / not processed as key

87 SL indicator / not processed as key

88 Num Lock

89 /

90 *

91 -

92 7

93 8

94 9

95 +

96 4

97 5

98 6

99 1

380


100 2

101 3

102 Enter / =

103 0

104 decimal point

381

Chapter 10. InitializationFile Documentation(MYTTOUCH.INI)

My-T-Touch uses MYTTOUCH.INI tomaintain various options and configurationsettings. Depending on the version of Windowsand settings, there may be one file per user or ashared file for all users.

My-T-Touch Initialization FileDocumentation(MYTTOUCH.INI)

Listed below are settings and information for

382

Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation(MYTTOUCH.INI)

specific applications that require specialactions by My-T-Touch, along with theConfiguration settings for My-T-Touch. TheBrackets [ ] denote the area in theMYTTOUCH.INI file, or the application namewhere special consideration is required. Anylines starting with a semi-colon ( e.g. ; ) arecomments and detailed information not foundin the MYTTOUCH.INI file.

IMPORTANT NOTE: This documentationstretches back over 19 years, covers 4major releases of Windows families, andover a dozen specific Windows versions.Due to changes in the operatingenvironment, certain settings andconfiguration options have becomeobsolete. In most cases, these remaindocumented and notated as obsolete. Forcustomer support (and the sometimesextremely specific customer needs), themultitude of options & flexibility has

383


become a crucial aspect of this software.Because of this, every last capabilityneeds to be documented somewhere, andthis chapter is used for that purpose.

All Settings are the default Settings ofMy-T-Touch.

[Configuration]

The following is the default configuration forMy-T-Touch at Install.

(Added in 1.78)

ConfigPath=1

This setting determines where theconfiguration files will be located.ConfigPath=0 means the configuration fileswill be in the installation folder - there are noper user configuration files with this setting anduser permissions must allow read-write access

384


to at least the KEYBOARD.KBF andMYTTOUCH.INI, or users must run with afixed (read-only) configuration. WhenConfigPath=1 or ConfigPath=2, each user willhave their own configuration files. IfConfigPath=3, these are in shared among allusers in a public location.

Note that the MYTTOUCH.INI file in theinstallation folder determines the location ofnew users’ configuration files, and if anadministrator changes this after My-T-Touchhas already been used by other users, theirexisting individual configuration files will NOTbe transferred to the new location. What willhappen is the software will be unable to findconfiguration files for the current user in thecurrent specified path, and a copy of thecurrent configuration files will be used as astarting point for this new location.

This is a breakdown by Operating System of385


the specific locations used - [User] indicatesthe actual user logged onto the system, and[ProductDir] indicates the Product’s directoryname, e.g. the MYTTOUCH folder.

ConfigPath Locations

ConfigPath: 0Windows 2000/XP: \ProgramFiles\[ProductDir]Windows Vista/7: \ProgramFiles\[ProductDir]

ConfigPath: 1Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents andSettings\[User]\Application Data\InnovationManagement Group\[ProductDir]Windows Vista/7:C:\Users\[User]\AppData\Roaming\InnovationManagement Group\[ProductDir]

ConfigPath: 2

386


Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents andSettings\[User]\Local Settings\ApplicationData\Innovation ManagementGroup\[ProductDir]Windows Vista/7:C:\Users\[User]\AppData\Local\InnovationManagement Group\[ProductDir]

ConfigPath: 3Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents andSettings\All Users\ApplicationData\Innovation ManagementGroup\[ProductDir]Windows Vista/7:C:\ProgramData\Innovation ManagementGroup\[ProductDir]

Contention=1

The Contention setting is the global oroverriding setting - This must be set to 1 forthe individual application settings to berecognized by My-T-Touch - if you wish

387


My-T-Touch to remain over all applications,set Contention=0 - you will need to be carefulin certain applications as noted in theindividual application settings below. This isreferred to "React to Dialogs..." in My-T-TouchSetup, additional details can be found in theHelp for the Operation Options dialog.

(Obsolete since 1.70)

InterfaceApproach=1

My-T-Touch has several internal strategies tointerface with other windows in the Windowsenvironment. It is believed that the strategyindicated by InterfaceApproach=1 is the bestfor all windows applications. This is obsoletefor all 32-bit versions. This is left for referencepurposes & a reminder that the software stillhas internal options regarding the interfaceapproach.

OpenFirst=1

388


OpenAbout=0

OpenFirst is set at installation to automaticallyopen with the My-T-Touch splash screen andgo directly into the My-T-Touch Welcome.This is set to 0 once My-T-Touch runs the firsttime. It is not used again. If OpenAbout=1,My-T-Touch will Open with the My-T-TouchSplash Screen instead of the quickMy-T-Touch logo. It primarily is a left overfrom the development stages of the openinglogo, but was left in for those user’s who don’tmind or prefer the longer opening.

OpenCentered=0

If OpenCentered=1, then the My-T-Touchwindow will be centered and placed in thelower portion of the screen (based on thecurrent resolution). This overrides the positionsetting saved in the KBF file. Also, this will setOpenCentered=0, making this a one-time usesetting. When set, the internal logic centers

389


horizontally based on the System metrics(GetSystemMetrics API) for FullScreen X, andlower part of the screen based on FullScreen Y(single monitor). This can be useful forexternally controlling opening position byoverriding the KBF positioning, for testing, orfor first-open / display situations.

NoSplash=0

If NoSplash=0, then the splash (openingintroduction) screens are used at Startup ofMy-T-Touch. If NoSplash=1, then the introscreens are not used, and My-T-Touch opens aspreviously configured. This option can beinitiated at run-time / via a shortcut by addingthe -NoSplash option to the command line.(e.g. "C:\ProgramFiles\MYTTOUCH\MYTTOUCH.EXE-NoSplash")

TypeMatic=1

390


StartDelay=500

KeyDelay=20

The TypeMatic settings are for automatictyping when you hold down a key onMy-T-Touch. Set TypeMatic=1 if you wish thistype of action, or set TypeMatic=0 if you wishto disable automatic typing. The StartDelayand KeyDelay are only meaningful ifTypeMatic=1. StartDelay is the delay inmilliseconds a key must be held down beforethe TypeMatic action begins. The default is 500milliseconds or 1/2 a second. The KeyDelay isthe delay between successive keystrokes sent.The KeyDelay setting is also in milliseconds.Note that the enable/disable key optionsoverride the typematic setting. Note also thatTypeMatic is available in My-T-Touch Setup |Configuration | Operation Options.

Cursor=2100

391


This is the current cursor that My-T-Touch useswhile over the My-T-Touch Keyboard display.Valid settings are as follows:

Small Right Hand is 2000

Small Left Hand is 2020

Small Right Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =2040

Small Left Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =2060

Large Right Hand is 2100

Large Left Hand is 2120

Large Right Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =2140

Large Left Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =2160

Standard Arrow = 2600

CrossHairs = 2620392


Dot = 2640

Invisible / clear = 2660

TrapDialAKeyCursor=1

Note - the name is a hold-over from theDial-A-Key option. In My-T-Touch, this is thesetting that indicates whether the cursor will bedisplayed over the Magnifier panel. IfTrapDialAKeyCursor=1, the cursor will bedisplayed over the magnified image. IfTrapDialAKeyCursor=0, the cursor will not beshown.

Icon=3100

This is the My-T-Touch Icon to thatMy-T-Touch will use when My-T-Touchminimizes to an icon. Valid Settings are: FixedIcons, My-T-Touch logos, Keyboard images,etc. 3000, 3001, 3002, 3003, 3004, 3005, 3006,3007 My-T-Touch Text Icons (diff’t colors)3050, 3051, 3052, 3053, 3054, 3055, 3056

393


Animating icons 3100, 3104, 3108

(Obsolete)

IconAnimate=0

NOTE: This is a holdover from the originalWindows 3.0 release. For all Windows versionsbeyond 1995, this should be 0. The Iconsettings are for which Icon My-T-Touchdisplays upon minimizing to an icon, and if theicon should animate. NOTE: Some icons arenot meant to animate, so if IconAnimate=1 theonly animation action will be to flash theborder. The IconAnimate setting is used to tellMy-T-Touch to animate the icon if it is ananimating icon and IconAnimate=1. SetIconAnimate=0 to disable icon animation.

(Obsolete)

IconOnTop=1

NOTE: This is a holdover from the original

394


Windows 3.0 release. For all Windows versionsbeyond 1995, this is not used. If IconOnTop=1,the Icon will remain as a topmost window, sothe icon will always be visible. IfIconOnTop=0, the My-T-Touch icon will be anormal window, and will fall behind otherwindows.

MinimizeToButton=1

If MinimizeToButton=1, My-T-Touch willminimize to a button (title bar button) insteadof an Icon, and ignore other Icon settings. IfMinimizeToButton=0, My-T-Touch willminimize to an Icon (Taskbar button). IfMinimizeToButton=2, then the Tray Icon willbe used. If MinimizeToButton=3, thenMy-T-Touch will minimize to amovable/sizable window.

CaptionWatch=0

ButtonOffsetX=0

395


ButtonOffsetY=0

These are special settings for the Minimize toButton option. Since there may be otherwindows that use the top left portion of thecaption bar, the following settings may helpalleviate any conflicts:

In Windows 95 & greater, the right side of thecaption bar is used - negative values may beused to adjust towards the left. IfCaptionWatch=1, My-T-Touch will sense ifthere is a Window other than the window thatowns the caption bar in the area that theMy-T-Touch button will be placed.My-T-Touch will then move to the right of theWindow that is already in the caption bar. If theabove does not work for your application, youmay add in button offsets to move the top-leftposition of the button - these will be added tothe original position of the button and theMy-T-Touch button will then be placed at the

396


offset.

(Added in 1.76)

ButtonOverrideW=0

ButtonOverrideH=0

By default, the button sizes to the height of thecaption bar (title bar) using the GDI callStretchBlt. A customer requested the ability tomodify the width of the button for touchscreenusers, so these settings have been added toallow full customization of the displayedbutton (when minimize to the button state isselected). For both ButtonOverrideW (width),and ButtonOverrideH (height), if set to 0, thenthe default calculations occur (e.g. fixed width,size height to caption bar). If ButtonOverrideWis non-zero, then the entered size (in pixels) isused for the width. If ButtonOverrideH isnon-zero, then the entered size (in pixels) isused for the height. DO NOT USE negative

397


values - your button will not appear! (Select analternative minimize option to get atMy-T-Touch if this occurs). Because theStretch Bitmap call is used to fill out thedisplay, the button display may be distorted,especially as you get further from the defaultsize.

Minimize to Window Options (Floatingbutton in a Window): In 1.79, thesesettings take on a meaning whenMinimizeToButton=3 (minimize to afloating button in a movable/sizablewindow). A customer requested the abilityto open in the minimized state, yetseparate the default opening position ofthe floating window and the keyboard. Toaccommodate this, these settings take onsimilar meanings for the Window minimizeoption. If ButtonOverrideW is non-0, thenthe width for the floating window isspecified in the INI setting. Similarly, if

398


ButtonOverrideH is non-0, then the heightfor the floating window is specified in theINI setting.

(Added in 1.78)

ButtonOverrideX=-20000

ButtonOverrideY=-20000

By default, the button positions itself on theactive window’s caption bar (title bar). Acustomer requested the ability to force theminimized button to always position itself inone place on the screen. When these values arepresent in the INI file (or any value greater than-20000), then the entered ButtonOverrideX and/ or ButtonOverrideY values will be used whenminimized to a button. For example, ifButtonOverrideX=754 andButtonOverrideY=0, then the button willalways position itself on the upper right (800 x

399


600) of the screen, ignoring the active window.These settings are independent internally, butin practical usage they need to specificy a fixedscreen position.

Minimize to Window Options (Floatingbutton in a Window): In 1.79, thesesettings take on a meaning whenMinimizeToButton=3 (minimize to afloating button in a movable/sizablewindow). A customer requested the abilityto open in the minimized state, yetseparate the default opening position ofthe floating window and the keyboard. Toaccommodate this, these settings take onsimilar meanings for the Window minimizeoption. If ButtonOverrideX is somethingother than -20000, then the X screenposition for the floating window is as set inthis INI setting. Similarly, ifButtonOverrideY is something other than-20000, then the Y screen position for the

400


floating window is as set in this INI setting.If command line overrides are used, theywill be used (these settings will notoverride the command line override).

(Added in 1.78)

ButtonIgnoreWindowXY=0,0

If this entry exists in the INI file, then thisestablishes a lower limit (if both the x,y entriesare non-0), then these values will be used as acheck against the active window, and if thewindow’s size (X and Y) is less than the entriesspecified here, then the button will NOTposition on this window. This was requested bya customer to prevent the button from movingto small display windows. For example, ifButtonIgnoreWindowXY=100,100 than anywindow less than 100 x 100 will be ignoredwhen determining the active window. Note that

401


BOTH entries are used, so if a window is 200 x50, then it would not be ignored, since the Xvalue is not less than 100.

(Added in 1.78)

ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=0

If ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=1, then a call toGetSystemMetrics(SM_CMONITORS) iscalled and if the system has only 1 monitor,then the button will not be allowed to moveoff-screen (for example, if the active windowhas a title bar off screen, or the window iswider than the screen). TheButtonOffsetX/ButtonOffsetY entries are usedin the calculation, but the screen will still limitthe location of the minimized button. IfButtonSingleMonitorLimit=2, then the singlescreen limit will be used, regardless of howmany monitors in the system.

BackgroundColor=6201

402


The BackgroundColor setting is the KeyboardBackground color that paints the backgroundof the Keyboard & Edit & Magnifier panels.Valid settings are as follows:

6200 - 6215 Solid Colors

6216 - 6230 Various DitheredGrays/White/Black

Note: The dithered colors may paintimproperly on some My-T-Touch sizes.

SlideOption=1

If SlideOption=1 My-T-Touch panels will slideout & snap in.

If SlideOption=0 My-T-Touch panels will snapout & snap in.

Size=9

This is the My-T-Touch display size. Validsizes are 1-12 if set manually.

403


Version 1.67 added infinite sizes - valuesgreater than 12 should not be handled here -use the SzUp & SzDn in the software tochange sizes larger than 12. The softwarehandles the transition from 1 to 9, 10 to 12, 12to 13, and 13 and larger differently. The sizingissues arise from maintaining the aspect ratio,visual aesthetics, and internal coding thatshould be reworked. At some point, it may be.As it exists, arbitrarily changing the sizes inincrements greater than 1 can cause problems,especially if crossing the transition from theoriginal sizes (i.e. 1-12) and larger sizes. It isrecommended that all sizing be handled withinthe normal operation of the software. Refer tothe Devevloper’s Kit utilities, such as Copyand Configure MTS, that can arbitrarily changethe size configuration of My-T-Touchon-the-fly for sizing flexibility.

SizeMax=12 (example)

404


SizeMin=8 (example)

When these values are present, they determineboundaries where the user cannot change thesize below SizeMin or above SizeMax. Whenthe size is at the SizeMin, the SzDn key andmenu options to size down are disabled, andwhen the size is at the SizeMax, the SzUp andmenu options to size up are disabled. Thesecan be used together, or independently. Thesesettings were requested by a customer to keep aset range of sizes available to the user, but notlet the user stray too far from the preferredworking sizes.

Center=1

RestorePosition=0

The Center setting is used to automaticallycenter My-T-Touch on the screen if it isrepositioned due to an window conflict. SetCenter=1 if you wish to center My-T-Touch

405


when it is moved, or Set Center=0 if you wishMy-T-Touch stay in the same horizontalposition on the screen. If RestorePosition=1,My-T-Touch will remember the screen positionit was at when it was forced to move due to awindow conflict, and then restore that positionwhen the conflicting window is no longer theactive window. If RestorePosition=0,My-T-Touch will remain at its new positionwhen forced to move due to a window conflict.Note: Window conlicts are set below in theClass Settings for window Classes & Actions.Note: Most users felt that it was less annoyingfor My-T-Touch to remain at its new position,than to constantly jump back & forth.

TwoButtonMouse=1

If TwoButtonMouse=1, then My-T-Touch willignore the middle button, regardless of theMouseButtons settings below, and My-T-TouchSetup will not allow the user to change the

406


middle button setting. If TwoButtonMouse=0My-T-Touch & My-T-Touch Setup will assumethere is a 3 button Mouse, and that the properdrivers are installed for use within Windows.

IMPORTANT: My-T-Touch will not work withthe middle button if the proper drivers are notinstalled. The default IBM PS/2, Microsoftdrivers do not support the middle button, andeven some drivers of 3 button mice do notsupport the middle button within Windows.Check with your mouse manufacturer to obtainthe proper drivers if you have a 3 button mouseand Windows does not recognize the middlebutton.

Keyboard=1

This is the Keyboard description fileMy-T-Touch uses to define the 101 Key panellayout. The 104 layouts start in the 100+ range,so adding 100 to the 2-digit listing refers to the104 key layouts, e.g. 101 is the US Standard

407


104 key layout. Over the 19 years & differentWindows versions, our support team would benotified that a particular layout was not correctin a certain version of Windows. Since withany particular release, multiple versions ofWindows are supported, and it was thoughtthat a keyboard layout would remainconsistent, changes to the layouts were deemedproblematic - for example, if it was changedfor Windows version X, this change wouldcause problems in older versions of Windows.So certain layouts are tagged "Old" to reflectthat it might be required for an older version ofWindows. The values 1-96, and 101-196, andany 200+ entries listed are valid, and arerelated as follows:

01 = U.S. Standard, 02 = U.S. DvorakStandard, 03 = U.S. Dvorak Left-Handed, 04 =U.S. Dvorak Right-Handed, 05 = U.S.My-T-Easy (ABC) Alphabetic Keyboard, 06 =

408


Belgian (comma), 07 = British, 08 = CanadianMulti-lingual, 09 = Danish, 10 = Dutch, 11 =Finnish, 12 = French, 13 = French Canadian,14 = German, 15 = Icelandic, 16 = Italian, 17 =Latin American, 18 = Norwegian, 19 =Portuguese, 20 = Spanish, 21 = Swedish, 22 =Swiss French, 23 = Swiss German, 24 = U.S.International, 25 = Hungarian (Old), 26 =Belgian (period), 27 = Arabic, 28 = Belarusian,29 = Bulgarian, 30 = Bulgarian (Latin), 31 =Croatian, 32 = Czech (Old), 33 = Czech(Qwerty), 34 = Estonian, 35 = Greek, 36 =Hebrew, 37 = Hungarian, 38 = Irish, 39 =Latvian, 40 = Latvian (Latin), 41 = Polish(Old), 42 = Romanian, 43 = Russian (old), 44= Slovak, 45 = Slovak (Qwerty), 46 = Turkish(F type), 47 = Turkish (Q type), 48 = Spanish(Mexico), 49 = U.S. Fazekas, 50 = U.S.Chubon, 51 = Slovenian, 52=Japanese, 53 =Chinese, 54 = Korean, 55 = French (Belgian),56 = French (Luxembourg), 57 = German

409


(Austrian), 58 = German (Leichtenstein), 59 =German (Luxembourg), 60 = Spanish(Argentina), 61 = Spanish (Bolivia), 62 =Spanish (Chile), 63 = Spanish (Columbia), 64= Spanish (Costa Rica), 65 = Spanish(Dominican Republic), 66 = Spanish(Ecuador), 67 = Dutch (Belgian), 68 = Dutch(Netherlands), 69 = Italian (Switzerland), 70 =Norwegian (Bokmal), 71 = Portuguese(Brazilian), 72 = Spanish (Guatemala), 73 =Spanish (El Salvador), 74 = Spanish(Honduras), 75 = Spanish (Modern Sort), 76 =Spanish (Nicaragua), 77 = Spanish (Panama),78 = Spanish (Paraguay), 79 = Spanish (Peru),80 = Spanish (Puerto Rico), 81 = Spanish(Uruguay), 82 = Spanish (Venezuela), 83 =English (Australian), 84 = English (NewZealand), 85 = English (Jamaica), 86 = English(United Kingdom), 87 = Chinese (Cangjie), 88= Canadian Multilingual, 89 = Polish, 90 =Polish Programmer, 91 = Thai, 92 = U.S.

410


Plum, 93 = Russian (Cyrillic), 94 = Danish(ABC), 95 = U.S. (Numpad Enter), 96 =Czech, 97 = Belgian (period), 101-197 are the104 key layouts matching the above, 200 = 104British (1st alternate), 201 = 104 British (2ndalternate), 202 = 104 Hebrew (Alt.), 203 = 104Chinese (Zhuyin) (Alt.), 204 = 104 Arabic(Alt.)

DriveTypesToCheck=1

DefaultDrive=C

CheckFloppies=0

These values are for the System Informationdisplay.

DriveTypesToCheck can take 4 values, whichhave the following meanings:

0 = Do not check Removable Drive Types, orNetwork Drives

1 = Do not check Removable Drive Types,

411


Check Network Drives

2 = Check Removable Drive Types, but Do NotCheck Network Drives

3 = Check Both Removable & Network Drives

DefaultDrive is the drive letter of the defaultdrive that My-T-Touch displays in the SystemInformation Panel.

Valid letters are A through Z.

CheckFloppies=0 means that My-T-Touch willnot look at drive letters A or B. IfCheckFloppies=1, My-T-Touch will look atFloppy Drives A and B.

CheckMinMax=1

If CheckMinMax=1, My-T-Touch will checkfor the existence of the Minimize Button &Maximize Button on the Caption Bar of theWindow before Minimizing or Maximizing thewindow when MIN or MAX is used on the

412


Windows Controls Panels. SetCheckMinMax=0 to bypass this check. This isimportant for custom window displays that donot use the standard windows controls forMinimize and Maximize.

ClassWatch=0

WindowWatch=0

KeyWatch=0

SetActiveWindowWatch=0

SkipTopMostAction=0

These settings can be used for debuggingcertain aspects of the operation withinWindows, or which specific key numberscorrespond to key operation on My-T-Touch

These settings are for individuals experiencedwith Windows Environment and windowclasses & names, and Windows programming,or at least its concepts.

413


The ClassWatch & WindowWatch settings arefor watching the Class Name & Window Nameof the active Window. These primarily are forfinding this information so that the SpecialSettings & Class Settings can be modified forMy-T-Touch to work with other applicationWindows. If ClassWatch=1 My-T-Touch willdisplay on the upper portion of the display theClass Name of the active window. IfWindowWatch=1 My-T-Touch will display onthe upper portion of the display the WindowName of the active window. Once thisinformation has been determined, theClassWatch & WindowWatch should be setback to 0.

KeyWatch=1 will display the keys affected bythe enable/disable key option - this will displaythe number + 1000. Only the alpha and editpanel keys are displayed. This is useful ifbuilding a different keyboard mapping, and

414


need to identify which key number is which.

SetActiveWindowWatch=1 will display whichinternal call is being used to call theSetForegroundWindow API from My-T-Touch.This can determine which area of code isresponsible for this API call. For more detailson this, refer to Microsoft’s documentation onthe SetForegroundWindow API function, andthe changes that occurred in Windows 2000with regards to changing the keyboard focusand active (i.e. foreground) windowprogrammatically. This entry also serves adouble duty, and it displays a code identifyingthe internal call used to save data to theKEYBOARD.KBF file.

If SkipTopMostAction=1, this bypasses theinternal code that tries to bring My-T-Touch tothe topmost position during normal operation.In general, having an on-screen keyboard fallbehind other windows is not productive.

415


However, there can be conflicts and issues ifmultiple windows are trying to maintain thetopmost position in the Windows internalwindow manager list. Also, it has been thegeneral consensus that menus in the systemremain above the on-screen keyboard. Duringoperation from a pen, touchscreen, or otherpointing device, selecting menu selections iseasier, more intuitive, and more effectivedirectly from the pointing device, rather thanindirectly from the on-screen keyboard. Youcan refer to the MenuClasses entry below forMenu interface options. For debuggingpurposes, or to see how My-T-Touch willoperate by bypassing this window interfacecode, you can set SkipTopMostAction=1.

SetupSaveSettings=0

(The next 2 are obsolete)

SetupAutoLoad=0

416


SetupAutoRun=0

These settings are for My-T-Touch Setup totrack whether My-T-Touch has beenconfigured for these special settings. They areused as follows:

The SetupSaveSettings is used if My-T-Touchis running. If SetupSaveSettings=1,My-T-Touch will update its configuration filewhen My-T-Touch Setup is closed. This willensure that My-T-Touch will open with thecurrent configuration. This is default set to 0 sothe user can become familiar with all of theMy-T-Touch configuration options beforedeciding which configuration My-T-Touch willopen with. If the user is confused as to whyMy-T-Touch does not open the way they left it,then this setting should be set to 1. NOTE: Thiswill only work for configuration changes madein My-T-Touch Setup. SetupAutoLoad &SetupAutoRun are used internally to track

417


whether My-T-Touch has modified theWIN.INI file "load" and "run" options.

The SetupAutoLoad and SetupAutoRun havebeen disabled since version 1.32 because ofuser confusion. Most users use the StartUpgroup, or understand the Load and Run settingsin the WIN.INI. They remain because they maybe reworked and included in a future release.

EnableOperator=0

Password=5F626274

(OnScreen Note - The EnableOperator settingis used for the Basic & Advanced modes inOnScreen - the Password andSupervisor/Operator mode are not available inOnScreen)

The Supervisor/Operator mode has beenincluded, but it is default off. IfEnableOperator=1, then My-T-Touch opens inthe Operator mode. This disables the

418


My-T-Touch Tool button, and the My-T-TouchMenu button, and requires a password to beentered before My-T-Touch Setup is opened.This effectively limits the Operator to one(saved) configuration, but allows a supervisorto modify or change the My-T-Touchconfiguration if necessary.

Note: The password is encrypted - the defaultentry above corresponds to "PASS". TheMy-T-Touch Control Panel should NOT beavailable for use by the Operator, as this wouldallow the operator to modify the My-T-Touchconfiguration. Note that once the Setuppassword has been entered, My-T-Touchoperates in the supervisor mode. Close bothSetup & My-T-Touch, then restart My-T-Touchto re-enable the operator mode.

OperatorNoMin=0

(OnScreen note - this requires theSupervisor/Operator mode and therefore is not

419


available in OnScreen)

The default Operator mode still allows theoperator to minimize My-T-Touch. To Disablethis option, set OperatorNoMin=1, and theminimize button will no longer function,disabling all of the buttons on the Tool Bar.

ControlLogo=0

(OnScreen note: This is not supported)

When in operator mode, it is sometimesdesirable to remove the visual display of thebuttons on the Tool Bar. When ControlLogo=1,an optional Bitmap file will be loaded anddisplayed over the Tool Bar buttons. This is adeveloper enhancement, and the followingdetails assume a general understanding ofWindows:

Requirements for ControlLogo=1

In the installation or user directory specified by

420


ConfigPath, 12 bitmap files corresponding tothe 12 sizes of My-T-Touch need to be created:

NAME, WIDTH IN PIXELS, HEIGHT INPIXELS

LOGO01.BMP, 12, 46

LOGO02.BMP, 15, 58

LOGO03.BMP, 18, 70

LOGO04.BMP, 21, 82

LOGO05.BMP, 24, 94

LOGO06.BMP, 27, 106

LOGO07.BMP, 30, 118

LOGO08.BMP, 33, 130

LOGO09.BMP, 36, 142

LOGO10.BMP, 47, 190

LOGO11.BMP, 62, 250

LOGO12.BMP, 83, 322421


These files could be created via PaintBrush, orany other tool that creates bitmaps. Only16-color bitmaps are recommended because ofmemory & speed issues, but higher resolutionsshould operate satisfactorily. However, only16-color bitmaps are guaranteed to work. If nobitmap file is present for the current size, thenno buttons are displayed, and a blackbackground appears. Sample/template bitmapsmay be downloaded via IMG’s Web site athttp://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm

Prior to the 1.78 release, the installation pathwas the only possible location. In the original1.78 release, this actually used the location ofthe user’s configuration, e.g. the path based onthe ConfigPath entry. In 1.78 Release 2, thefollowing logic is used: The location specifiedby the ConfigPath entry is used, and if the logobitmap file does not exist, the installationfolder is tried. This allows more flexibility, so

422


that different users can have different customlogos, or a machine level setting can be usedby placing the logo bitmaps in the installationfolder. This can also allow a specific user tooverride the default logos.

Editor=NOTEPAD.EXE

ControlPanel=CONTROL.EXE

ControlPanelKeyboard=rundll32.exeshell32.dll,Control_RunDLL main.cpl @1,1

These are the default settings for My-T-TouchSetup. Editor is the Executable used to modifythe MYTTOUCH.INI file accessed fromMy-T-Touch Setup, Configuration, Special.ControlPanel is the Windows Control Panelaccessed by My-T-Touch Setup, Keyboards.ControlPanelKeyboard is the WindowsKeyboard Layout Applet for selecting thecurrent keyboard layout that is in use. Thesemay be changed if relevant for the Windows

423


Configuration in use.

InstallPath=C:\%PROGRAMFILESDIR%\MYTTOUCH

This is created at Installation time to signifythe chosen InstallPath. If you need to moveMy-T-Touch, we suggest you Un-Install, andthen re-install My-T-Touch to the new path.

ShowKeys=111111111111111111111111111111...

This setting indicates which keys are visiblefor the standard keyboard (Alpha) panel. TheEsc key is key 0 and the count increases fromleft to right, row by row. A 1 indicates that thekey is visible, and a 0 indicates that the keywill not be painted, and not accessible.

AllowFrameMove=1

This is for controlled applications, or wherethere may be extraneous movement caused bythe touchscreen driver. If AllowFrameMove=1then any non-key area will trigger the move

424


My-T-Touch action via click & drag. IfAllowFrameMove=0, then it will not bepossible to move My-T-Touch via the selectedbutton click. My-T-Touch must be moved via asecondary button selection (My-T-TouchSetup, Mouse Buttons) or by an externalapplication.

VirtualPointer=1

If VirtualPointer=0, then the default action ofMy-T-Touch for button clicks and moves is inuse. This setting is best for standard systemhardware such as the mouse, trackball,touchscreen, or pen. Set VirtualPointer=1 ifsoftware control for the mouse cursor (pointer),or other devices are in use. If there are anyproblems experienced while moving theMy-T-Touch window using a click, drag,release, then VirtualPointer=1 may also betried.

SingleKeyPerClick=0425


This setting is used to distinguish the operationof My-T-Touch for clicks. The default action(SingleKeyPerClick=0) is to act exactly like aphysical mechanical spring key, where a downclick; drag off motion will generate akeystrokes (i.e. once the finger is dragged offthe key, it will bounce up and this will generatea keystroke). If SingleKeyPerClick=1, thenonly the key that was pointed to during thedown click will be generated, even if the cursoris dragged onto adjacent keys or other parts ofthe My-T-Touch window. If the cursor isdragged off of the My-T-Touch window whilethis setting is on, then the key-up event willoccur, and the keystroke will be generated. It isrecommended that the Typematic setting be setoff if SingleKeyPerClick is set on to disablemultiple keystrokes of the same "down" key.

BorderNoHit=0

This setting is used to identify pixels around426


the edge of the keys (top, left, bottom, right)that will not be used to identify a key press.Since the setting is in pixels, the actual valueswill differ between the 12 sizes available. Asetting of 6 for My-T-Touch size 8 will create anoticeable border. Valid values are from 0 to100. Note that a pixel value larger than the 1/2the key size in pixels will result in an unusableconfiguration, and values larger than the keymay create software errors in internalcalculations.

ForceUnHook=0

The ForceUnHook option toggles an internalvariable that is used to track whether thesystem journal hooks should be set at all times,or only when the cursor is over a typing panel.The primary reason for this is to test / resolvepotential conflicts with other softwareapplications.

Note: Because of internal operation of the427


variable, it is opposite to the displayed settingin Operation Options, e.g. ForceUnHook=0results from Track Pointing Device input at alltimes being set On (checked), andForceUnHook=1 results from Track PointingDevice input at all times being set Off (cleared)

1.70 notes: This has taken on a strongermeaning with the 1.70 release. We have foundthat only a few non-mouse drivers trulyemulate the mouse driver functionality. In orderto support touchscreen, pen, and non-mousedrivers that do not put sufficient delays (and letother window processes run) between the moveand click events, the system hooks Always on(i..e. Track Pointining Device Input at alltimes) is required to handle focus issues in allpre-Win 2000 versions of Windows. In general,a mouse cannot generate a click until it ismoved into position (generatingWM_MOUSEMOVE messages over the target

428


window) - My-T-Touch uses these messages toset System hooks in preparation for thepossible WM_?BUTTONDOWN messages, toprevent the focus switching events. When atouchscreen, pen, or other non-mouse drivermoves & sends click events without a delay orrelease to other window processes running(part of the pseudo- multitasking required byproperly written windows programs),My-T-Touch cannot prepare for the focusshifting events. "Click on release" settings inthe driver may alleviate the undesirable results,or leaving these hooks Always on can alsomake for more desirable operation. A greatdeal of effort was made to resolve the focusissues without the use of these system hooks,but only through the use of these couldseamless operation occur throughout allwindows applications & input situations. Ifproblems arise where the system hooks settingscauses My-T-Touch to become unresponsive,

429


setting Track Pointing Device Input at all timesoff may resolve this situation, and investigatingoptions within the pointing device driver(touchscreen, pen, etc.) may be helpful.

2 additional notes

1) Windows 2000 and above do not require theuse of system hooks, so this setting is notrelevant (and the situations described above donot apply)

2) Try My-T-Touch on the system with anactual mouse device - if the problems do notoccur, please contact the device drivermanufacturer and inform them that theirpointing device driver does not emulate amouse properly.

NoHooksEver=0

This is the setting called Alternate VirtualInterface in My-T-Touch Setup In Windows2000/XP, there is no need for the system

430


hooks, and this setting is automatically enabledwhen running in Windows 2000/XP. In testingwith older and assistive technology devices &software, it was found that some of theserequire this setting (95/98/Me/NT). If youexperience any typing difficulties & a generalnon-responsiveness from My-T-Touch, youmay try NoHooksEver=1 (Alternate VirtualInterface set On).

(This is obsolete)

RunAddFontResource=0

This was added to remove the call to theAddFontResource Windows API for Windows95 / 98. On certain systems, the delay inducedby Windows during this call caused problemsin other programs / Windows during startup.

Since it is not required if the software wasproperly installed, it was removed in version1.61. It still is called if run in Windows 3.1. Set

431


RunAddFontResource=1 to force this callduring startup in Windows 95 / 98. Thissettings has no effect for Windows 3.1.

KeyboardUpdate=0

This setting is used as a flag when a keyboardlayout is modified in Setup to indicate that thecharacter set, AltGr status, and lowercasedisplay setting should be read from the KMFfile. It is managed automatically through Setup,but if keyboard layouts are modified manually,it may be wise to set this to 1 prior to runningMy-T-Touch.

KeyboardFontBase=MyTMouse

KeyboardFontMedium=MyTMouse

KeyboardFontLarge=Arial

KeyboardCharSetBase=22

KeyboardCharSetMedium=22

KeyboardCharSetLarge=0432


Keyboard1SizeAdjBase=0

Keyboard1SizeAdjMedium=0

Keyboard1SizeAdjLarge=1

Sizes 1-6 are the Base sizes. For almost alluses, the MyTMouse font is the best choice.

Medium Sizes are 7-9.

Large Sizes are 10-12 and sizes greater than 12.

The Character Set for Base / Medium / Large(KeyboardCharSet...) settings allow changingthe character set used to reference the keyboardcharacters.

The following lists documented sets

ANSI_CHARSET = 0

DEFAULT_CHARSET = 1

SYMBOL_CHARSET = 2

MyTMouse = 22

433


MAC_CHARSET = 77

SHIFTJIS_CHARSET = 128

HANGEUL_CHARSET = 129

HANGUL_CHARSET = 129

JOHAB_CHARSET = 130

GB2312_CHARSET = 134

CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET = 136

GREEK_CHARSET = 161

TURKISH_CHARSET = 162

VIETNAMESE_CHARSET 163

HEBREW_CHARSET = 177

ARABIC_CHARSET = 178

BALTIC_CHARSET = 186

RUSSIAN_CHARSET = 204

THAI_CHARSET = 222

434


EASTEUROPE_CHARSET = 238

OEM_CHARSET = 255

In general, use 22 for MyTMouse and 0(ANSI) otherwise.

This affects the Windows GDI selection offonts, and can be useful if specific charactersare not being selected as desired from thecurrent KYBD????.KMF.

The Keyboard1SizeAdj... settings refers to theamount subtracted from the available area ofthe key (total pixels) used to display the fontcharacter. Even though it strongly affects keydisplays of 1 character (i.e. alphanumeric keyson the Keyboard (Alpha) panel), it does havesome effect on all buttons displayed. As thenumbers increase the calculated area availablefor the required display character(s) becomessmaller, forcing a smaller font to display.

LowerCaseDisplay=1435


If LowerCaseDisplay=1, then the defaultkeyboard display will contain lower casecharacters, only changing to upper case whenthe Shift or Caps Lock is engaged. IfLowerCaseDisplay=0, then Upper Casecharacters will always be used on the keyboarddisplay.

IgnoreSystemCapsLock=0

This setting was asked for by a customer usingthe TS version with Citrix. Apparently thereare some synchronization problems withindifferent client versions of Citrix, and the Capslock operation can be inconsistent. By default,My-T-Touch queries the system to establish theCaps Lock state - on a normal PC, this operatesas one would expect - the Caps Lock statestays in sync between the physical keyboardand My-T-Touch. By settingIgnoreSystemCapsLock=1, the portions ofcode that monitor the system Caps lock state

436


are bypassed. Note that when the Caps Lockkey is used on My-T-Touch, the appropriatekeystroke is sent, but the state (key display /Caps lock ligh on Num panel) withinMy-T-Touch will not reflect the change,because the system is not being queried, andthese updates are bypassed. In order to addressall possible system situations based on theCaps Lock state, additional options have beenadded. The following lists the 6 differentsettings available for IgnoreSystemCapsLock:

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=0 (Default)

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=1 Does not repaintbased on System Caps Lock

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=2 Paint Cappedkeys based on Internal Caps Lock state, butdo not change key action

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=3 Paint Capped

437


keys based on Internal Caps Lock state,change key action to shifted state if capped(This emulates Caps Lock action if CapsLock is NEVER set on system)

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=4 Paint Cappedkeys based on Internal Caps Lock state,change key action to shifted state if NOTcapped (This emulates Caps Lock action ifCaps Lock is ALWAYS set on system)

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=5 Paint Cappedkeys based on Internal Caps Lock state,change key action to opposite of cappedstate (this would be used if the caps lockstate is always opposite the Internal Capslock state - however, this suggests the capslock works on the system, so you reallyshouldn’t be ignoring it)

CapsLockMode=0

If CapsLockMode=0, then the key will visually

438


latch based on the Caps Lock mode, e.g. theCaps Lock will be shown as a key down forCaps Lock On, key up for Caps Lock Off. IfCapsLockMode=1, then the Caps Lock keywill be treated as any other key, and not tied toCaps Lock State

UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=0

This setting is to accommodate the changefrom Common User Interface (Consistent UserInterface) (Consistent??) options for Cut CopyPaste & Undo. Most applications support bothversions, but for those that do not, or requirethe original keystrokes, this setting has beenprovided. Note that My-T-Touch uses thenewer version by default.

UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=0 means:

Cut = Ctrl-X

Copy = Ctrl-C

439


Paste = Ctrl-V

Undo = Ctrl-Z

UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=1 means:

Cut = Shift-Del

Copy = Ctrl-Ins

Paste = Shift-Ins

Undo = Alt-Backspace

DragMode=2

The DragMode setting was added to be moreconsistent with the Windows appearancesettings. The following are the settings & whatthey mean: DragMode=0, drag full windowcontents, ignore Windows settings;DragMode=1, drag with focus rectangle,ignore Windows settings; DragMode=2, useWindows settings to determine drag mode

HoldShiftCtrl=0

440


This was added as a test for a customer, andhas been left as an option. By default,My-T-Touch holds the shift & control stateuntil the key is actually sent. For example, witha Shift-T - this results in a Shift-Down at theshift key press, then a T-down, T-up, Shift-upafter a T key press. (Same for the Ctrl key).With HoldShiftCtrl=1, the Shift-down is helduntil the T key press, resulting in a Shift-down,T-down, T-up, Shift-up when the T key isreleased. The Alt key is the System key inWindows, and it is not included within thisoption.

MenuOffset=200

This setting was added in 1.70 to addressWindows 98 & its multiple monitor support.This is updated internally as the popupMy-T-Touch menu is is used (offset is thewidth of menu). Windows 98 incorrectlydisplays the menu off screen (does not adjust to

441


ensure that the menu is visible on the screen).Therefore, there are some adjustments madeprior to using the Windows APITrackPopupMenu when in Windows 98.Issues: The LICENSE.EXE updates theregistry at: HKLM\Software\ InnovationManagement Group\Windows with a version #- this must be "98" to invoke this action (only aproblem in Windows 98). The width itself isadjusted when one of the secondary popupmenus is used (Size, Settings, Position).

If the Windows Display Properties |Appearance modifies the displayed width ofthe popup menu, one of these menus isrequired to be opened to force an update of theoffset value internally.

Transparency=0

This setting is for Windows 2000 and later.When set to 1, various options are enabled withMy-T-Touch to allow modifying the

442


transparency for the displayed window. Whenenabled, the TransparencyLevel defines how"visible" the window is - a lower-limit of 20has been set in the SEETHRU.EXE (to preventthe user from making the keyboard completelyinvisible), and the level of 255 makes thewindow completely opaque (the disabledstate).

TransparencyLevel=75

This is the current level of visibility, where 0means invisible, and 255 means the window isopaque (same as if the Transparency were 0(disabled)). The little control program(SEETHRU.EXE) has a lower limit of 20, andthese settings are saved to this INI file whenMy-T-Touch gets the message fromSEETHRU. You can make the windowinvisible by setting Transparency=1 andTransparencyLevel=0, and then do not runSEETHRU.EXE. See the Developer’s Kit for

443


external control info.

(This is obsolete)

Begin WinLogon settings

The WinLogon settings & following supportsettings are for 95/98, and handled byIMGLOGON.EXE - My-T-Touch LogonUtilities The following section runs throughAllowDomainEdit.

WinLogon=0

If WinLogon=1, then special code is used toproperly type into the windows logon screen(Network Client, Windows user logon, etc.).This is a patch to work prior to release of fully32-bit My-T-Touch. My-T-Touch should be runvia RunServices option in registry:HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\RunServices

(These are obsolete)

1.70 Notes

444


The ForcePassword????? Options only affectoperation during the use of the Map NetworkDrive dialog

ForcePasswordLower=0

ForcePasswordUpper=0

These two settings change the way charactersare sent to the windows logon / passworddialog. Set ForcePasswordLower=1 to forcelowercase characters to be sent, or setForcePasswordUpper=1 to force uppercasecharacters. ForcePasswordUpper will overridethe ForcePasswordLower setting.

ForcePasswordMixed=1

This setting overrides the upper & lower casesettings and allows mixed case & punctuationentry. Most networks only allow a limited setof password characters, but this setting wasadded for additional flexibility, and set as thedefault. The original specification from a

445


customer for this option was all Upper case,and other customers eventually required theseadditional options.

Version 1.70 Notes: DisableEnter changes, andUserNameNotPassword and AllowDomainEditare not used.

DisableEnter=0

Version 1.70 modified this entry, managed bythe My-T-Touch Logon Utilities

This setting is used to resolve logon problemsresulting in a system hang. Typically othersoftware in the system is part of the problem,and using the logon option in as clean a systemas possible is recommended. If there areincomplete logons, or the system does notresume normal operation after logon, theDisableEnter setting can be used. In testing, itwas found that logon problems were related tothe system hooks being set. When

446


DisableEnter=0, the Enter key operatesnormally. If DisableEnter=1, then the Enterkey does not process any reaction, forcing theuser to click OK on the logon dialog. Thedialogs affected are Enter Windows Passwordand Enter Network Password. Note theForceUnHook setting should be set to 1.

(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)

DisableEnter=0

This setting is used to resolve logon problemsresulting in a system hang. Typically othersoftware in the system is part of the problem,and using the logon option in as clean a systemas possible is recommended. If there areincomplete logons, or the system does notresume normal operation after logon, theDisableEnter setting can be used. In testing, itwas found that logon problems were related tothe system hooks being set. WhenDisableEnter=0, the Enter key operates

447


normally. If DisableEnter=1 orDisableEnter=2, the Enter key is disabled onthe My-T-Touch keyboard, AND during thelogon, system hooks are in use only while thecursor is over My-T-Touch (see VirtualPointer,ForceUnHook settings). This forces the user toclick on the OK button on the Password dialog,and forces the system hooks to be disabledduring logon. If DisableEnter=1, then normaloperation resumes upon typing into anywindow after logon. If DisableEnter=2, thenthis forces operation similar to ForceUnHook -even after logon.

(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)

UserNameNotPassword=0

The default keyboard focus is on the passwordfield. To override this (without requiring theuser to use the Tab key), setUserNameNotPassword=1. This will force thedefault keyboard focus to be on the User Name

448


at logon. The default (if this entry is notpresent) is ;0.

(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)

AllowDomainEdit=0

By original design (at the request of acustomer), the domain was not editable (therewas no way the user could edit the domainfield). To allow this field to be edited by theuser, set AllowDomainEdit=1.

End WinLogon settings

(OnScreen only)

WantATVersion=1

This setting should be 1 for OnScreenoperation - it is not available in non-ATversions (non Assistive Technology versions).This may be a future option, but as of the 1.73version, it should be set to 1 for OnScreen, butit is not used otherwise.

449


(OnScreen only)

SetupMode=0

This indicates whether setup is in the Basic orAdvanced mode. If SetupMode=0 then theBasic mode is in use, and only the dialog andoptions available in Basic mode are displayed.If SetupMode=1 then Advanced mode is inuse, and all options and advanced dialogs aredisplayed.

(OnScreen only)

KeyboardFile=1

This is used in conjunction with theWordComplete & ActionPanel settings. This isan internal setting and should not be modifiedhere. If KeyboardFile=1, then theWordComplete / Action panel is in use. IfKeyboardFile=0, then only the Action panel isin use. This setting is used internally, andreflects the WordComplete and ActionPanel

450


settings. This setting indicates which panel willopen when the Tool button (Icon /Top buttonon Tool bar) is used.

(OnScreen only)

WordComplete=1

If WordComplete=1, then the WordCompletePanel is open. If WordComplete=0, then thepanel is closed. This is used by setup, andinternally by My-T-Touch to indicate the stateof this panel. If WordComplete=1, thenActionPanel=1.

(OnScreen only)

IntlWordComplete=0

This was added as an option, but the settings inthe selected KBF override this setting forInternational Keyboards that have dead-keys,and Alt-Gr functionality. In 1.70, it has verylittle impact on operation, and should be left at

451


0 unless instructed to change by IMG technicalsupport.

(OnScreen only)

Suffixes=1

This indicates whether the Suffix mode isenabled. If Suffixes=1, then the Suffix buttonon the WordComplete panel is enabled, andsuffixes are automatically displayed after aword Completion. If Suffixes=0 then Suffixesare disabled, and no automatic display occurs.

(OnScreen only)

ActionPanel=1

This indicates whether the Action Panel isavailable. By default, the Action Panel isincluded with display of the WordCompletePanel, and is automatically set to 1 if this is thecase. If WordComplete is not enabled, then theActionPanel setting indicates whether the

452


ActionPanel is available. In general, theinternal setting of KeyboardFile overrides thissetting. The ActionPanel and WordCompletesettings are used by Setup in User Options, andall configuration should be managed throughSetup, rather than directly manipulating thesesettings.

(OnScreen only)

AutomaticU=1

If AutomaticU=1 then anytime a "Q" is used, a"U" is automatically added to the text. IfAutomaticU=0, then this option is disabled.

(OnScreen only)

AutoSpace=1

This indicates whether the Automatic spaces &Capitals is on. AutoSpace=1 indicates thatspaces after word completions and punctuationare automatically added. This also enables the

453


Auto-Caps option that sets after a punctuationcharacter, enabling the first letter of a newsentence to be capitalized. If Auto-Capitals isengaged, any character will automatically turnoff the Caps lock. To disengage, use the CapsLock key.

(OnScreen only)

AutoSpaceDisable=1

This indicates whether the Automatic spaces &Capitals sub-option of "Disable for single lineinput" is on. AutoSpaceDisable=1 indicatesthat when My-T-Touch senses a single lineinput, the Automatic spaces & Capitals featurewill be disabled. When AutoSpaceDisable=0,this special case for single-line input is notmonitored. When enabled, this featuresrequires a Windows event hook that monitorsthe system text caret (text input cursor). Thisonly monitors for single line system level"EDIT" class input windows.

454


(OnScreen only)

AutoCapI=1

This is used to enable internal coding thatforces a stand-alone character I to becapitalized automatically. This is intendedprimarily for normal lowercase typing as an aidto users. This action can be disabled by settingAutoCapI=0.

(OnScreen only)

SecondSpace=1

This is used when Automatic spaces & Capitalsis on (AutoSpace=1) If SecondSpace=1, then 2spaces are added after a punctuation character(period, question mark, exclamation point,etc.). If SecondSpace=0, then only a singlespace is used after a punctuation character.

(OnScreen only)

AutoArrange=1455


After different events, My-T-Touch willautomatically arrange the open windows forsmoother operation. For experienced orsophisticated users, this may be annoying. Bysetting AutoArrange=0, this default, automaticoperation is disabled. The Arrange button onthe My-T-Touch Action Panel will still arrangethe active window, by positioning the windowabove (or below) My-T-Touch, and filling theavailable space on the screen with theapplication window.

(OnScreen only)

AutoArrangeActive=0

This is only used if AutoArrange=1. WhenAutoArrangeActive=1, My-T-Touch willmonitor the active window (only when themouse cursor is over the My-T-Touch window)and if a new window becomes active, it willautomatically be arranged. This also has theeffect of automatically arranging the active

456


window when the mouse cursor is positionedover My-T-Touch (which some users findhelpful, and other users find annoying).Because of this, the setting is now separate anddefault off (AutoArrangeActive=0).

(OnScreen only)

AutoSaveMove=0

In 1.78 Release 2, OnScreen Setup has beenmodified to change the Operation Optionsoption to match the Save After Move entry inthe Options menu, and use the SaveAfterMoveINI entry (see below). The AutoSaveMoveoption still remains, and is implementedslightly differently than the SaveAfterMoveoption within the actual run-time software. Forpractical purposes, this setting is now obsolete.If it is used, then SaveAfterMove=0 should beset in the INI. Internally, the AutoSaveMovesaves the configuration and position as separatesteps, while the SaveAfterMove saves the

457


entire KEYBOARD.KBF in a single pass.

My-T-Touch will ALWAYS open at the lastsaved position. Originally designed toALWAYS save the current position aftermoving My-T-Touch, this has been added toaddress customers who dislike this defaultaction or where confused by the fact thatsometimes My-T-Touch did not open in their"saved" position. When On, My-T-Touch willexecute a Menu | Position | Save Positioncommand when a move has been completed.Turn this option Off to prevent these saves aftermoving My-T-Touch.

(OnScreen only)

ActionPanelEnabled=31

Each button on the Action Panel may beEnabled or Disabled. This setting uses adecimal value that is using a binary code toindicate each key, where 1 is Enabled and 0 is

458


Disabled.

These are the codes:

Back Key = 1, Size Key = 2, Select Key = 4,Move Key = 8 and Arrange Key = 16. Thesecodes are added together, and then saved as thedecimal value here. A value of 31 indicates allbuttons are Enabled.

For Example:

To Enable only the Back Key & Move Key youwould add 1 and 8 to result inActionPanelEnabled=9 When disabled the keywill be "grayed" and its action will not beavailable to the user.

(OnScreen only)

KeyboardEnabled=0

If KeyboardEnabled=1 then the PhysicalKeyboard is enabled for WordCompleteoperation. The WordComplete Panel MUST be

459


displayed for proper operation. See Help, andUser Options for more details on using thePhysical Keyboard. If KeyboardEnabled=0then the Physical Keyboard is not used.

(OnScreen only)

EnableDwell=0

If EnableDwell=1 then the Dwell KeypressTimer is enabled. This will engage the timerwhenever the pointer (mouse cursor) remainsat one position (over OnScreen). If the delayperiod expires, a click (Left or Right buttondown/up sequence based on the Mouse Buttonsetting) will be initiated. The pointer must bemoved again to reset/restart the timer. Todisable the dwell action, set EnableDwell=0.

(OnScreen only)

DwellTime=10

This is the length of the delay period used in

460


EnableDwell=1. Each unit corresponds to atick of 50 milliseconds. The default is 10, or0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds). The validrange is from 1 to 100.

(OnScreen implementation only - see belowfor others)

Sound=0

This can take on 3 settings. If Sound=0 then nosound is generated when buttons are usedwithin My-T-Touch. If Sound=1, then theKeyClick wave sound is played every time abutton is clicked. If Sound=2, then voices areused to describe each key (for the standard 101keyboard). See Sounds (Advanced Notes) for adescription of how to override the defaultsounds.

(Added in 1.76 for My-T-Pen, My-T-Soft,My-T-Soft TS, My-T-Touch)

(The implementation is different than in461


OnScreen (above) because default waveresources are NOT included within theexecutable - only external wave files will beused)

Sound=0

This can take on 3 settings. If Sound=0 then nosound is generated when buttons are usedwithin My-T-Touch. If Sound=1, then theKeyClick wave sound is played every time abutton is clicked (similar to OnScreen).However, the Keyclick wave is not included inthe resources, so only the override setting willwork, using the "KEYCLICK.WAV" file in theSounds folder. If you wish to use a differentsound, copy the wave file over the"KEYCLICK.WAV" file in the Sounds folder.If Sound=2, then key numbered files are usedto describe each key pressed, as long as there isa corresponding "numbered" entry in thesounds folder. Refer to Sounds (Advanced

462


Notes) for details on key numbers, and othernotes regarding this option. Also note thatthere is no user interface for this, it must bemodified in the INI file. See the NoAnnouncesetting below if Text-To-Speech services areenabled on the platform and the announcementtriggered when Sound=1.

(Added in 1.78)

NoAnnounce=1

When Sound=1, IMGSOUND.EXE is loaded,and if Text-To-Speech Services are available,IMGSOUND will announce this fact byspeaking "Text-To-Speech is available". In thecommercial products, this can be annoying,since the sound is primarily only uesd forkey-click audible feedback. SetNoAnnounce=1 to skip this announcement. IfNoAnnounce=0, then this "Text-To-Speech isavailable" announcement will be spoken.

463


(OnScreen only)

TopOffset=2

This is a setting used to help positionOnScreen without affecting the Taskbar. Thisallows the Taskbar to be placed on top of thescreen with the Auto-Hide option enabled, andlet the user have enough "space" to trigger theTaskbar display.

(OnScreen only)

TTSAvailable=0

This is the main option to enable theText-To-Speech (TTS) functionality.TTSAvailable=1 is required to enable TTS inOnScreen, but also requires that theappropriate classes & supporting TTS softwareis installed on the system. Forcing this settingon a system without the appropriate TTSsoftware installed & configured properly willnot accomplish anything. The supporting

464


process IMGSOUND.EXE is required tohandle the TTS requests within OnScreen.When TTSAvailable=1 is set in OnScreen, itenables the internal processing withinOnScreen to hand-off the speech request to theIMGSOUND process. The setting handles theSpeak Key Text under pointer processing. IfIMGSOUND cannot find, establish theinterface, and communicate with the TTSspeech components, the TTS option will notoperate. IMG has repackaged the requiredMicrosoft Speech Components inMSSPEECH.MSI (which requires theWindows Installer). The file & the supportWindows Installer for early versions ofWindows 98 and NT 4 can be found in theSpeech folder on the distribution media, or onthe IMG WebSite. Note that IMGSOUND willplay "Text to Speech is Available" whenOnScreen starts to indicate this capability. Ifthe all OnScreen TTS options are disabled, this

465


will still occur at startup of OnScreen - todisable this action, remove the SpeechComponents - Start Menu | Settings | ControlPanel | Add/Remove programs, SpeechComponents. Note that for discrete pointingdevices (touchscreens, etc.) that do not hoverwell, this setting may not operate in a desirablefashion.

(OnScreen only)

TTSRepeat=0

This setting handles the option of repeating thesame key text for constantly when over a key.The TTSRepeat=1 will cause a constant streamof speech requests, based on the TTSDelay(see below). To disable the repeat function, setTTSRepeat=0.

(OnScreen only)

TTSDelay=20

466


This is the delay time (in 50 ms increments) -the default 20 corresponds to about 2 secondsbetween speech requests. Increase the settingto stretch out the delay between speechrequests, or decrease the number to make therepeats quicker. Note that not all speech eventsare of the same length, so modifying this maycause incoherent speech events. If you haverepeating speech events overlapping, increasethis setting - this may occur if you have a slowrate set for the voice. This setting is also affectshow long you must be over a specific keybefore the key will be spoken.

(OnScreen only)

TTSSpeakWord=0

This setting defines whether OnScreen willspeak the word upon selection in theWordComplete panel (Speak Word on Click).TTSSpeakWord=1 means the word will bespoken when clicked. TTSSpeakWord=0

467


means no speech event will occur on selectionin the WordComplete panel.

(OnScreen only)

TTSSingleCharKey=0

When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting willdetermine how Text-To-Speech reacts when thekey to be spoken has just a single character.TTSSingleCharKey=1 will speak the singlecharacter key, and 0 will disable singlecharacter key speech. For intermediate &advanced user, there is no need to hear the"normal" keys, and this can be used to disablespeech for the common keys.

(OnScreen only)

TTSWordsKey=0

When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting willdetermine how Text-To-Speech reacts when thekey to be spoken has a word. TTSWordsKey=1

468


will speak the description (or the word) on thekey (any key with 2 or more characters).TTSWordsKey=0 will disable speech for keyswith 2 or more characters.

(OnScreen only - special meaning whenCrossScanner in use)

TTSWordComplete=0

When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting willdetermine how Text-To-Speech reacts whenover the WordComplete words. Since these aredynamic, this third subset of keys may beselected independently. SetTTSWordComplete=1 to speak theWordComplete words, setTTSWordComplete=0 to disable.CrossScanner: When enabled, andCrossScanner is running, CrossScanner willstep through the available words and speakthem (delay handled in CrossScanner withMenu Speed setting) The CrossScanner user

469


may select the word when it is highlighted. Thesequence may be restarted by clicking on thebuffer key in the WordComplete panel.

(OnScreen only)

TTSScanWordComplete=0

When TTSAvailable=1 is set, andTTSWordComplete=1, this optional settingwill perform what CrossScanner would do ifCrossScanner was running - scan the theWordComplete panel, highlighting each word,speaking each word, and if there is a mouseclick, type the highlighted word. UseTTSScanWordComplete=1 to enable theautomatic scan of WordComplete candidateseach time the list is updated. This feature isdriven by the process IMGSOUND.exe andmonitors mouse clicks via theWINEVENT.DLL. Added for a user using anon-standard pointing device, and theimplementation expects the selection using the

470


left-mouse click, and cancel using theright-mouse click. There are several instanceswhere the hardware events are coded for thedevice, and a non-standard configuration willnot work with this option. This option shouldbe set to TTSScanWordComplete=0 ifCrossScanner is in use.

(Originally OnScreen only, supported inslightly different ways in all releases)

ExpandAKey=0

This setting defines whether the "Zoom"window will appear If ExpandAKey=1, then aseparate window will appear to magnify thekey under the mouse pointer, ifExpandAKey=0, this option is disabled.

The size of the Windows is defined by thefactor (see ExpandAKeyFactor below). Internallogic is used to decide if the window is aboveor below the pointer. If part of the key is

471


off-screen, the key will not be displayed. Notethat for discrete pointing devices(touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, thissetting may not operate in a desirable fashion.For Touchscreens, and other arbitraty pointinput devices, the HideZoomWindow optionshould be enabled.

(OnScreen only)

ExpandAKeyFactor=3

This setting is handled automatically withinOnScreen Setup: Large is 3, Larger is 5, andLargest is 7. This setting can be modifieddirectly, but if you run setup, and select OK onthe Enhance dialog, the setting will beoverwritten. Valid values are 2-20, but anythingover 10 will probably be too large for actualuse. Larger windows (settings) will work betteron faster systems, faster video sub-systems.

(Originally OnScreen only, supported in

472


slightly different ways in all releases)

HideZoomWindow=0

Added for Touchscreen support forExpandAKey (Key Zoom),HideZoomWindow=1 will hide the magnifiedkey when a key click occurs.HideZoomWindow=0 results in no reaction toany clicks - the mouse cursor will need to beoff My-T-Touch window to remove the Zoomwindow. In Windows Vista / 7, when thissetting is HideZoomWindow=1, the Zoomwindow will automatically fade away on itsown.

(OnScreen only)

MouseOverHiLite=0

This setting indicates whether the key underthe pointer will be highlighted or not.MouseOverHiLite=1 will enable the highlight,MouseOverHiLite=0 will disable any highlight

473


action. This setting can be used separately or inconjunction with the ExpandAKey (Zoom).The internal operation uses the invert optionwithin the BitBlt API call, so different colorsettings will cause different highlight views.The WordComplete panel is handled separately(it was an add-on to the original design, sothere may be artifacts upon resize paints) -these will resolve themselves in normaloperation, or slide the pointer off the OnScreenwindow.

Note that for discrete pointing devices(touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, thissetting may not operate in a desirable fashion.

(OnScreen only)

ControlPanelToggleButtons=1

This setting indicates whether the control panel(Tool Button Opens & Closes Control panel)will display "latched" keys or not. When

474


ControlPanelToggleButtons=1 the buttons willdisplay as "latched" - visually down. TheToolTextIn and ToolTextOut colors will still beused (see below, [Colors]). For originaloperation, set ControlPanelToggleButtons=0.

Note: This setting is not available in OnScreenSetup, it is only available here.

(Versions later than 1.75, OnScreen)

EnableMouseScroll=1

When EnableMouseScroll=1, and OnScreen islarger than the screen display, and a portion isnot displayed, by holding the mouse pointer atthe edge of the screen where OnScreen scrollsoff the display, the OnScreen window will bemoved back onto the display, in increments setby the ScrollMovePixels (see below). Inoperation, it is more intuitive than thedescription - by moving the mouse toward theportion of OnScreen you wish to access &

475


holding at the display edge, OnScreen willscroll into view. To disable this action, setEnableMouseScroll=0

EnableScreenScroll=0

This setting has been added for CrossScanner& touchscreen users. Since the ability to holdthe mouse pointer at a particular location, e.g.the screen edge is difficult with variouspointing devices (see EnableMouseScrollabove), when EnableScreenScroll=1 (EnableScroll Window - OnScreen Setup | Appearance| Size) a scroll Window will appear with aslider, and buttons to move the OnScreenwindow. Because this takes screen real-estate,and OnScreen may be moved by dragging, andnot all users operate OnScreen in aconfiguration that is larger than the displaysize, it is default off (EnableScreenScroll=0).

ScrollMovePixels=6

476


This is the amount of move that will occur forEnableMouseScroll / EnableScreenScrollsettings (see above). For quicker movement,increase the number. Because the purpose ofthis scroll is to access portions of OnScreen notvisible, smooth scrolling may not be ashigh-priority as speed of operation. Note thatas the number of pixels get larger, the choppierthe scroll onto the display will appear. Notethat speed of the system and video sub-systemwill affect the actual operation.

CenterOversize=1

This setting handles the position ofMy-T-Touch when sized, and the resultant sizeis wider than the screen width. IfCenterOversize=1, My-T-Touch will becentered, leaving an equal portion off the leftside of the screen & off the right side of thescreen. If CenterOversize=0, then the left sideof My-T-Touch will be aligned with the left

477


side of the screen display, leaving theright-hand portion of My-T-Touch off thescreen. CrossScanner users may prefer settingCenterOversize=0.

(OnScreen with CrossScanner only)

CrossScanner=1

This is an internal setting set by CrossScannerto handle different interface settings requiredby CrossScanner (different from the standardinterface settings for My-T-Touch). Thecommunication between OnScreen andCrossScanner is handled automatically, andthis setting should not be modified manually.The following section will be created to handlethe reset of OnScreen when CrossScanner isasleep or closed:

[CrossScanner]

MinimizeToButton=0

478


NoHooksEver=0

ForceUnHook=0

These settings track the original settings ofOnScreen and are handled dynamically byCrossScanner and OnScreen. They should notbe modified manually. If there are anyproblems with interface settings whenOnScreen is run independent of CrossScanner,use OnScreen Setup to re-configure

(OnScreen only)

LetterAssist=1

This setting controls the look-ahead and letterselection processing when using theWordComplete panel. When LetterAssist=1,based on the currently typed letters and thelookup word list, only possible next letters willbe available to the user. When LetterAssist=0,no additional look-ahead processing will occur,and no modification to the keys available to the

479


user will be done.

(OnScreen only)

ShowAsGrayed=1

This setting is only available whenLetterAssist=1. When ShowAsGrayed=1,letters not possible (based on the current letterstyped and the current word list) will be shownas grayed out letters. When ShowAsGrayed=0,for any letter that is not possible (based on thecurrent letters typed and the current word list),the entire key will not be shown and will not beavailable to the user.

(OnScreen only)

AllowGrayedKey=1

This setting is only available whenLetterAssist=1 and ShowAsGrayed=1. WhenAllowedGrayedKey=1, the user will still beable to select and type with grayed out keys

480


(those that will not build words based on thecurrent letters typed and the current word list).When AllowedGrayedKey=0, the grayed keyswill not be selectable.

(OnScreen only)

KeysOnlyAssist=0

The setting is referred to as WC-Assist, orWordComplete Assist. WhenKeysOnlyAssist=1, the top row of number keyson the keyboard panel turns into 2 sets of 1-5selection buttons when WordCompletecandidates are available (colored the same asthe WordCompletion candidate buttons). WhenKeysOnlyAssist=0, no action occurs.

(OnScreen only)

KeysOnlyAssistNumbers=0

This setting is only relevant whenKeysOnlyAssist=1, and this is only available in

481


the INI file. When KeysOnlyAssistNumbers=1, the function key row isreplaced by number keys (to replace thenumber keys overtaken by the WordCompletecandidate selection buttons) whenWordComplete candidates are available. Inmost typing situations, function keys are notused very often, and this provides number keysas an alternative to temporarily disabling theWC-Assist function to access the number keys.

(Added in 1.75a)

NumPadAlways=0

This is an option available only in the INI file,requested by a customer. By default, theNumeric keypad acts exactly like a physicalkeyboard, and responds to the state of the NumLock setting. When NumPadAlways=1, theNumeric keypad (Num Panel), will always actas if the Num Lock is on & type numbers,ignoring the actual state of the Num Lock

482


toggle / light / keyboard state. This wasrequested to ensure proper operation if the useraccidentally toggles the Num lock, or anotherapplication modified this keyboard state.

(Added in 1.75d)

Win2000ShutDown=1

During the shut down sequence in Windows2000, My-T-Touch is still enabled, and cancause painting problems if moved orconfigured. Set Win2000ShutDown=1 todisable My-T-Touch during this ShutDowndialog. If you wish My-T-Touch to operateduring the Shut Down sequence (or any similardialog in Windows), set Win2000ShutDown=0.This problem is not seen in Windows XP.When Win2000ShutDown enabled,My-T-Touch monitors for a Dialog as Topmost,with DS_FIXEDSYS, DS_CENTER styles. Ifthis type of dialog found, then special internalhandling occurs - If opened or minimized to

483


button, moving and the window is disabled, forother minimized options

(Added in 1.75F)

DisplayChangeEnabled=1

This setting determines how My-T-Touchresponds to the Display Change Windowmessage when the resolution is changed (e.g.rotation, changing color depths, or screenappearance). When DisplayChangeEnabled=1My-T-Touch will reposition in an analogousposition on the new display configuration.My-T-Touch will reposition itself on screen ifany portion was positioned off screen. IfDisplayChangeEnabled=2, then the attempt topreserve an analogous position will bemaintained - if using rotation software (portrait/ landscape), then this setting is notrecommended, as it could result in positioningMy-T-Touch off screen after a rotation.

484


(Added in 1.78)

SessionChangeEnabled=0

This setting determines how My-T-Touchresponds to the Session Change Windowmessage when the session is changed (e.g. FastUser Switching). WhenSessionChangeEnabled=1, My-T-Touch willautomatically open from a minimized state (ifnecessary) and restore settings. With the userspecific settings (ConfigPath=1 orConfigPath=2), this is not relevant, but ifConfigPath=0 or ConfigPath=3, then thisoption could still be required, especially inWindows XP. When there are shared settings,one user can modify settings, and then asession change event can occur. To preventsynchronization issues between the savedsettings and active configuration, when thesession change event occurs (and the SessionChange Message is sent), My-T-Touch will

485


restore settings from the current saved settings.

(Added in 1.76)

ReadOnlyOK=0

This setting was added for the Windows NTbased platforms to address some securityconcerns. If ReadOnlyOK=1, then files will beopened as Read Only, and Savingconfigurations / options, etc. from withMy-T-Touch will not occur. WhenReadOnlyOK=0, the KEYBOARD.KBF filewill be opened with Read/ Write access, andRead/Write access will be expected forMYTTOUCH.INI. In secure situations whereusers will be granted Read / Read & Executepermissions, this setting allows operation ofMy-T-Touch in a Read Only mode. Note thatreconfiguring is possible during operation(unless the Operator Mode is enabled), butMy-T-Touch will always open with the"original" settings from KEYBOARD.KBF &

486


MYTTOUCH.INI. 1.77 Note - to use thisoption, AllowReadOnlyOperation must be 0There is a slight distinction between the 2settings. If AllowReadOnlyOperation=0 andReadOnlyOK=1, then the configuration fileswill always be opened in a read-only mode,and the configuration cannot be updated. IfAllowReadOnlyOperation=1 (ReadOnlyOKignored), then files will be opened asread/write UNLESS this fails because of userrights, then they will be opened as read-only.To prevent operation of My-T-Touch if user hasread-only rights, set both ReadOnlyOK=0, andAllowReadOnlyOperation=0

(Added in 1.77)

AllowReadOnlyOperation=1

This setting is an override for the ReadOnlyOKsetting to address limited rights users inWindows NT based platforms. In 1.77 it isdefault On, bypassing the error message when

487


the KEYBOARD.KBF & MYTTOUCH.INIfiles are Read Only, and running My-T-Touchas if ReadOnlyOK was set on

(Added in 1.77)

ManualToolControl=0

The tool bar can be turned off in 1.77, and thissetting determines if there is any manualinterface available to toggle the tool bar. Theoriginal design of the software used the toolbar as the anchor & always visible element sothe user would be able to manipulate theconfiguration as desired. Developers requestedthat this panel be removed so the user haslimited options with the software when it istightly integrated into an application. In earlierversions, the operator mode / custom logooptions allowed some control over this panel.Refer to the Developer’s Kit for tools tomanipulate this panel programmatically. Thissetting allows manual control by the user when

488


enabled. When ManualToolControl=1, a3-click approach can be used to toggle the toolbar. By clicking 3 times (1-2-3) in the samespot (border or non-key areas only), the toolbar panel will close if opened, or open ifclosed. When ManualToolControl=0, thisaction is ignored. For touchscreens (& otherless accurate pointing devices), you may setManualToolControl to a larger value. If morethan 1, then the number indicates the numberpixels of "jitter" that will be allowed to countthe click as part of the 1-2-3 sequence. Forexample, ManualToolControl=5 enables the3-click tracking, and allows a +/- 5 pixel rangefrom the 1st click to count as the second &third clicks.

(Added in 1.77)

WindowsKeysGraphics=1

This setting controls whether the graphics aredisplayed on the Windows Key and

489


Applications key on the 104-key layouts.When WindowsKeysGraphics=1, bitmapimages are overlaid onto the keys. For smallersizes, these may be unclear, since a StretchBltoperation is performed. SetWindowsKeysGraphics=0 to disable thisoption - the text label for the Windows key is"Wnds", and the Application key is "App"

(Added in 1.77)

WindowsKeyWndsLatch=1

This setting affects the operation of theWindows key on the 104 key layouts. WhenWindowsKeyWndsLatch=1, the key will latchin a down position, allowing it to modify thenext key typed. This is for Windows functionssuch as Win-E or Win-F (Search for Files, etc.)- this is the default setting. IfWindowsKeyWndsLatch=0, the key will notlatch, and operate as a simple key, sending adown/up release on down/up press. By default,

490


this will open the start menu. You will not beable to operate the Windows shortcut optionwith this setting, since the key will not latchdown. However, macros can still be used withthis setting at 0.

(Added in 1.77)

TabletPCEnabled=1

This setting affects operation within WindowsXP, Tablet PC edition. WhenTabletPCEnabled=1, Pnlwatch.exe will beexecuted, which monitors if the Tablet PCInput Panel. PanelWatch monitors the requestfor the Tablet PC Input Panel, and coordinatesdisplay of My-T-Touch. When enabled,Pnlwatch.exe is placed in the All Users StartupGroup as My-T-Touch Tablet PC Interface.PanelWatch can also be controlled manually.When run normally PanelWatch does not showa window or create any display for the user.When PNLWATCH.EXE is run directly (or the

491


My-T-Touch Tablet PC Interface is run fromthe StartUp Menu), PanelWatch will display anicon in the System Tray (notification area nextto the clock). So if PanelWatch is alreadyrunning, running it again will toggle thedisplay of a notification icon. When Enabledfrom the menu, the TabletPCEnabled=1 is setPanelWatch is run, and the StartUp icon iscreated in the All Users group (as long as userhas sufficient rights to create this shortcut file).When disabled, TabletPCEnabled=0 is set,PanelWatch is closed, and the StartUp groupicon is removed.

(Added in 1.77)

MenuForceForeground=0

This is a setting that determines how theMy-T-Touch menu is handled in Windows2000/XP. In order to handle input focus issues,by default the opening the menu does not bringMy-T-Touch to the foreground as the input

492


window - this causes some interface issues(menu falls behind other windows, does notclear if click on other windows, etc.). Theseuser interface issues may be undesirable tosome users, and this option allows for userpreferences If MenuForceForeground=0, menuissues may result, but window with currentkeyboard input focus will remain - typing onMy-T-Touch will type into current foregroundwindow. If MenuForceForeground=1, menuissues will not occur, but My-T-Touch willbecome foreground window - user mustreselect typing window before typing onMy-T-Touch.

(Added in 1.78)

SaveAfterMove=0

SaveAfterChange=0

SaveAtClose=0

SaveAtEndSession=0493


These settings are used to trigger an automaticsave of the current settings and position of thekeyboard window, after the appropriate event.SaveAfterMove=1, means that after anykeyboard window move, the settings andposition will be saved. If SaveAfterChange=1,then the settings and position will be savedafter any panel is opened or closed, or sized upor down. If SaveAtClose=1, then the settingsand position will be saved when theMy-T-Touch is closed. IfSaveAtEndSession=1, and if the user logs offor shuts down the system, then the settings andposition will be saved. Note that SaveAtCloseand/or SaveAtEndSession effectively overrideSaveAfterMove and SaveAfterChange, sinceeventually My-T-Touch will be closed, or theuser will shut down / log off, and the currentsettings will be saved. Also, My-T-Touch can’tbe restarted (to use the current settings andposition without being closed at some point.

494


(Added in 1.78)

TerminalServerConsoleEnable=0

This setting allows a non-server based productto run in the context of the server console. Ingeneral, only My-T-Soft TS should be used ona server where Terminal Services are available.However, there have been times when (forvarious reasons) customers run a server basedoperating system as a stand-alone machine.When TerminalServerConsoleEnable=1 for thenon-server based products, the normallicensing will enable these products to run on aserver, in the context of the server console (i.e.at the display monitor for the server, but NOTas a remote terminal). By default, thenon-server products sense this operation, ask ifthis desired, and saveTerminalServerConsoleEnable=1automatically.

(Added in 1.78)495


EnableScan=0

When EnableScan=1, keyboard scanning isenabled, and a transparent overlay is used toindicate the current scanning area withinMy-T-Touch. The following settings ONLYapply when EnableScan=1. WhenEnableScan=0, keyboard scanning is disabled.Only in OnScreen does the user have access tothis setting from OnScreen Setup, but keyboardscanning is available for all 1.78 versions.

(Added in 1.78 R2)

ScanSound=1

This setting controls the sound for eachdiscrete scanning step. When ScanSound=0,there is no sound used. When ScanSound=1, a"scan" sound is used. When ScanSound=2,Text-To-Speech is used, announcing panels,rows/columns, and individual keys based onsettings for Text-To-Speech announcements for

496


the scan groupings (see below). ForScanSound=1, the wave file is"scan-sound.wav" in the SOUNDS folder.

(Added in 1.78 R2)

ScanEnableDisableSound=1

When ScanEnableDisableSound=1 is set, aspecial "Enabled" and "Disabled" sound(scan-enable.wav and scan-disable.wav in theSOUNDS folder) is played when scanning isenabled or disabled. This is helpful if Alt-X isused to toggle scanning (e.g. a trainer workingwith a user).

(Added in 1.78)

ScanColor=0

If ScanColor=0, an inverted color display ofthe current scan area is used within thescanning overlay If ScanColor=1 a blackoverlay is used during scanning, and if

497


ScanColor=2, then a white overlay is used.Depending on the transparency setting,My-T-Touch colors, the display itself, and theuser, one color setting may be easier todistinguish over the other.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanTransparencyLevel=255

This setting can take on values between 1 and255. In the Scanning Settings dialog, this istranslated into percentage, where 100% is 255.Technically this is an "opaqueness" setting, aslarger numbers make the transparent overlaymore opaque. Low values may make the actualoverlay impossible to see, and high values willprevent seeing through the overlay, making itineffective. Suggested values range between 50and 150, with the default at 70 for black andwhite, and invert is at the fully opaque 255.

(Added in 1.78)

498


ScanTime=1200

This is a setting in milliseconds that defines theamount of time spent at each scan step. Thedefault of 1200 relates to a 1.2 second delaybetween each successive scan step. From theScanning Settings dialog, values can be setbetween 50 and 5000. Values below 500 arenot recommended. This setting is also used asthe Timeout After setting when Step Scan isselected as the right-click mode, but it is usedat three times the current setting, so a 1200setting results in a timeout waiting period of3600 milliseconds, or 3.6 seconds.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanRightClickMode=2

There are 8 different right-click settings:

• ScanRightClickMode=0 means that theright-click is not used at all. This should be

499


set if the user cannot use, or does not haveaccess to a right-click event (second button).Note that even when set this way, aright-click can still result in a reset of thecursor clipping that is engaged during activescanning. Also note that if this is set to 0, itis critical that theScanReverseAfterNumScans be set to somevalue other than 0, otherwise the user willalways be forced to fully complete a scan, orbe forever stuck at a scan level with no wayto revert up a scan level.

• ScanRightClickMode=1 corresponds to afull reset to the top level Panels scan, so aright-click during any scan level will resetand begin at a top level Panels scan.

• ScanRightClickMode=2 is the default, andacts as the reverse of the left-click, meaningthe current scan level goes up to the previouslevel. So a right-click during a Key scan will

500


go to the Panel scan. A right-click during aPanel scan goes to the Panels scan, and aright-click during a Panels scan will Stopscanning (while leaving the scanning overlayat the current panel). At this stopped level, aleft-click will re-engage scanning again.

• ScanRightClickMode=3 means that aright-click will stop scanning at the currentscan level, leaving the scan overlayuntouched. A left-click will re-engagescanning at the same level.

• For ScanRightClickMode=2 &ScanRightClickMode=3, when stopped(paused), an additional right-click will movethe scan overlay off of My-T-Touch anddisplay "Left Click Here to Start Scanning",which will engage the scanning process.This allows a trainer or assistant to fullyaccess My-T-Touch and still be able toquickly re-enable scanning.

501


• ScanRightClickMode=4 results in aright-click advancing the scan (rather thanthe timer advancing the scan). This step scanallows the right-click to advanced & moveforward the scan at the user’s speed, ratherthan a fixed timer rate. This also enablesseveral changes - instead of scan speedsetting, this value is used as a timeout afterrate (multiplied by 3), which will revert upone level if the timeout period expires. Also,the physical keyboard is monitored, andwhen both the Control key and Alt keys areheld down (e.g. [Ctrl]-[Alt]) on the physicalkeyboard, this scan mode will stop(right-click on My-T-Touch to restart thescan process).

• ScanRightClickMode=5 results in aright-click aborting the current scan, andacts as though the scan was fully completed(i.e. all the way to key selection), and then

502


resets based on the Next scan setting. Thisallows quick resets using the right buttonwhile scanning.

• ScanRightClickMode=6 results in aright-click cancelling scanning completely.Only returning to My-T-Touch Setup &re-enabling scanning again will scanning bemade available.

• ScanRightClickMode=7 results in aright-click acting like a left-click. Thissetting allows either click to trigger a scanstep/selection.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanLeftClickMode=0

There are 4 different left-click settings (3effective) that affect what happens after theleft-click action occurs. In general, theleft-click steps down to the next scanning level.If stopped, scanning begins at the Panels scan,

503


scanning individual panels. During the Panelsscan, a panel is selected by the left-click, andthe panel scan commences. While scanninggroups of keys (as defined for the panel), aleft-click will begin an individual key scan.Finally, during a key scan, a left-click willselect the key, and act as a a "type" event forthe key (e.g. selecting the key). TheScanLeftClickMode affects what happens afterthis final key selection (i.e. Post Action) Theseare the 4 possible settings:

• ScanLeftClickMode=0 is the default setting,and means that the internal handling is notmodified in any way, which is to revert up tothe current panel scan (e.g. the middle level).So during a keyboard scan, and a subsequentkey selection, the keyboard panel willcontinue to be scanned.

• ScanLeftClickMode=1 corresponds to the

504


same group of keys being scanned, e.g. thescan remains at the key scan level.

• ScanLeftClickMode=2 means that thecurrent panel will be scanned at the panelscan. Although this is handled slightlydifferently internally, the effective result isthe same as ScanLeftClickMode=0 (or thedefault setting). Because the internal codingis different, the setting is here to address thisdifferent implementation.

• ScanLeftClickMode=3 results in a revert tothe top level Panels scan after a keyselection.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanReverseAfterNumScans=2

This setting determines how many times aparticular level will be scanned, beforeautomatically returning to the next higherlevel. At the Panels scan level, if the count is

505


reached, the scanning will stop, leaving thecurrent panel highlight by the scan overlay (aleft-click will restart the scan). IfScanReverseAfterNumScan=0, there is nomaximum, and a scan will continue at the samelevel until a user selects a scan highlight with aleft-click, or performs a right-click action.Because this setting is potentially problematicif there is no right-click available, this settingcannot be set to No Maximum if theRight-Click mode is set as None (or notavailable). In other words, never setScanReverseAfterNumsScans=0 andScanRightClickMode=0. Any positive numberfor ScanReverseAfterNumScans results in aninternal count, that will revert up one levelafter the count is passed. In Scanning Settings,values of 1-6 are available, but this value canbe any positive number (e.g. 1, 10, 20, etc.)

(Added in 1.78 R2)

506


ScanShowAllOptions=0

This setting indicates whether all options willbe shown for the "Next Scan" and "Right-Click(2nd Button) Mode". As the scanning optionsbecame more complex, it was suggested thatwe default to a limited number of options thataddress the majority of scanning usage. WhenScanShowAllOptions=1, then all possibleoptions are listed and shown in the drop downlists for these 2 settings. WhenScanShowAllOption=0, a limited set of optionsare shown. The order of some of the items willchange based on this setting.

(Added in 1.78 R2)

ScanOpenPanels=1

When ScanOpenPanels=1, the customizedpanel options are not available, and duringscanning, all open panels will be scanned,left-to-right. When ScanOpenPanels=0, then

507


the ScanOrder setting determines the panelsthat are scanned and their order.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardAlpha

The ScanOrder determines the order of thePanels scan level. The order is left to right aslisted. Panels should not be duplicated. Thislist can be easily manipulated and generatedfrom the Scanning Settings.The complete list of panels available (9 total) is:ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardNum,Toolbar,ControlPanel,WindowsControls,Macro,Calculator,and the naming should be self-describing of theactual panels in My-T-Touch Note that in thecommercial versions, the WordComplete panelcorresponds to the Magnifier panel.

Here are various examples & scanning ordersfor the panels:

ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardNum,Calculator

508


ScanOrder=Calculator,ControlPanel,Toolbar,Macro,WindowsControls,KeyboardNum,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardAlpha,WordComplete

ScanOrder=Calculator,KeyboardNum,KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,Toolbar,WordComplete,ControlPanel,Macro,WindowsControls

ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardNum,Calculator

ScanOrder=Calculator,Controlpanel,Toolbar,KeyboardNum,WordComplete

ScanOrder=KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardNum,Toolbar,ControlPanel

ScanOrder=ControlPanel,Toolbar,KeyboardNum,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardAlpha

For each panel in ScanOrder, there needs to bea corresponding Scan[Panel] entry below thatlists key groupings for the correspondingpanel. In all cases, the keys are numbered from1 to the maximum number of keys on thepanel. Groupings are separated by semi-colons(;), and individual keys are separated in thegroup with a comma (,). It is important thatonly valid key numbers are used, otherwise thebounding scan overlay may be incorrect, andpotentially cause other problems because ofinternal table lookups. It is also important that

509


no spaces be used, or any other characters orpunctuation. Also, there is an internalmaximum of 25 groupings allowed - if this isexceeded, the additional groupings will not beused. In order to provide additional examples(showing alternative groupings and row vs.column scans) and the correct entries, thefollowing lists various examples for eachpanel, along with the default settings.

Text-To-Speech announcements can beembedded within these groupings, so each rowor column can be named, and announced whenText-To-Speech is enabled within the Soundssection. All that is required is that the word orphrase be included prior to the keys listing,enclosed in square brackets (examples below).This is stripped out prior to processing the keysequence. It is important that the squarebrackets be opened and closed correctly, andthat there be no punctuation outside the square

510


brackets (spaces, etc. are allowed within thesquare bracket set, but no other square bracketscan be used). The panel descriptions arecurrently fixed internally.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanWordComplete=1,4,7,10,13;2,5,8,11,14;3,6,9,12,15;

There are 15 keys on the WordComplete panel.The default scan settings scans theWordComplete setting as columns, which ismore effective for accessing theWordComplete candidate column.

;;This is a row scan of the WordComplete panel

ScanWordComplete=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12;13,14,15;

;;This is the column scan of the WordCompletepanel with Text-To-Speech announcements

ScanWordComplete=[Options]1,4,7,10,13;[Words]2,5,8,11,14;[Actions]3,6,9,12,15;

(Added in 1.78)

511


ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;68,69,70,71,72

There are 72 keys on the Keyboard (Alpha)panel (101 layouts) and 75 keys for the 104layouts. The default scanning is in rows.

;;This is for row scan top to bottom withText-To-Speech Announcements

ScanKeyboardAlpha=[FunctionKeys]1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13; [Num-bers]14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;[Qrow]28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;[Homerow]41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;[Shiftrow]55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;[Final row]68,69,70,71,72

512


;;This for 101 layout

;;This is for row scan top to bottom

ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;68,69,70,71,72

;;This is for row scan bottom to top

ScanKeyboardAlpha=68,69,70,71,72;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13

;;This for 104 layout


ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;

513


14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;68,73,69,70,71,74,72


ScanKeyboardAlpha=68,73,69,70,71,74,72;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanKeyboardEdit=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12,13;

There are 13 keys on the Keyboard (Edit)panel. The default scan settings scans in rows,with the cursor arrow keys as one block.

;;This is row scan top to bottom

514


ScanKeyboardEdit=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12,13;

;;This is row scan bottom to top

ScanKeyboardEdit=10,11,12,13;7,8,9;4,5,6;1,2,3;

;;This is column scan left

ScanKeyboardEdit=1,4,7,11;2,5,8,10,12;3,6,9,13;

;;This is column scan right

ScanKeyboardEdit=3,6,9,13;2,5,8,10,12;1,4,7,11;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanKeyboardNum=1,2,3,4;5,6,7;9,10,11;12,13,14;16,17;8,15;

There are 17 keys on the Keyboard(Numpad/numeric) panel. The default scansettings scans in rows, with special handlingfor the elongated buttons on the right.


ScanKeyboardNum=1,2,3,4;5,6,7;9,10,11;12,13,14;16,17;8,15;


515


ScanKeyboardNum=8,15;16,17;12,13,14;9,10,11;5,6,7;1,2,3,4;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanToolBar=1;

There are 3 keys on the Toolbar panel. Thedefault scan settings only highlights the toptool button. Note that this means the panel scanand the key scan are the same, meaning 2left-clicks are required to select the key.

;;This scans all three buttons (but notrecommended for the scanning user)

ScanToolBar=1;2;3;

;;This scans all three buttons in an overlappinggroup

ScanToolBar=1,2;2,3;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanControlPanel=1,2;3,4;5,6;7,8;9,10;11,12;

516


There are 12 keys on the control panel. Thedefault scan settings highlights the 6 rows of 2buttons.





;;This is for column scan left to right

ScanControlPanel=1,3,5,7,9,11;2,4,6,8,10,12;

;;This is for column scan right to left

ScanControlPanel=2,4,6,8,10,12;1,3,5,7,9,11;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanMacro=1;2,3,4;5,6,7;8,9,10;11,12,13;14,15,16;

There are 16 keys on the Macro panel. Thedefault scan settings highlights the top buttonand the 5 rows of 3 buttons.

517



ScanMacro=1;2,3,4;5,6,7;8,9,10;11,12,13;14,15,16;


ScanMacro=14,15,16;11,12,13;8,9,10;5,6,7;2,3,4;1;


ScanMacro=1;2,5,8,11,14;3,6,9,12,15;4,7,10,13,16;


ScanMacro=1;4,7,10,13,16;3,6,9,12,15;2,5,8,11,14;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanWindowsControls=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12;13,14,15;16,17,18;

There are 18 keys on the Windows Controlspanel. The default scan settings highlights the6 rows of 3 buttons.



;;This is for row scan bottom to top518




ScanWindowsControls=1,4,7,10,13,16;2,5,8,11,14,17;3,6,9,12,15,18;


ScanWindowsControls=3,6,9,12,15,18;2,5,8,11,14,17;1,4,7,10,13,16;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanCalculator=1,2,3;4,5,6,7,8;10,11,12,13,14;15,16,17,18,19;21,22,23,24,25;9,20

There are 25 keys on the Calculator panel. Thedefault scan settings highlights the rows, andhandles the elongated buttons on the rightseparately.


ScanCalculator=1,2,3;4,5,6,7,8;10,11,12,13,14;15,16,17,18,19;21,22,23,24,25;9,20


ScanCalculator=9,20;21,22,23,24,25;15,16,17,18,19;10,11,12,13,14;4,5,6,7,8;1,2,3


519


ScanCalculator=1;2;3;4,10,15,21;5,11,16,22;6,12,17,23;7,13,24,18;8,14,19,25;9,20


ScanCalculator=3;2;1;9,20;8,14,19,25;7,13,24,18;6,12,17,23;5,11,16,22;4,10,15,21

(Added in 1.79)

ShiftLock=0

When ShiftLock=1, the role of the Shift keychanges - when the Shift key is pressed, it willstay in the Shift state until the Shift key ispressed again. ShiftLock=0 means the Shiftstate will clear when another key is pressed -this is the default operation. Note whenMulti-Touch is enabled, the Shift key can beheld down by a constant pressed down input.

(Added in 1.79)

ControlLock=0

When ControlLock=1, the role of the Controlkey changes - when the Control key is pressed,it will stay in the Control state until the Control

520


key is pressed again. ControlLock=0 means theControl state will clear when another key ispressed - this is the default operation. Notewhen Multi-Touch is enabled, the Control keycan be held down by a constant pressed downinput.

(Added in 1.79)

AltLock=0

When AltLock=1, the role of the Alt keychanges - when the Alt key is pressed, it willstay in the Alt state until the Alt key is pressedagain. AltLock=0 means the Alt state will clearwhen another key is pressed - this is the defaultoperation. Note when Multi-Touch is enabled,the Alt key can be held down by a constantpressed down input.

(Added in 1.79)

AltGrLock=0

521


When AltGrLock=1, the role of the AltGr keychanges - when the AltGr key is pressed, it willstay in the AltGr state until the AltGr key ispressed again. AltGrLock=0 means the AltGrstate will clear when another key is pressed -this is the default operation. Note whenMulti-Touch is enabled, the AltGr key can beheld down by a constant pressed down input.The selected keyboard layout mustpresent/support the AltGr key for this setting tohave any affect.

[Settings]

(Added in 1.79)

The Settings section contains shared settingsbetween the 1.x and 2.x software in preparationfor a future comprehensive KBF (KeyBoardFile) data structure that contains all settingsassociated with a specific user’s configuration.

XParallax=0

522


YParallax=0

The XParallax and YParallax settings allow forsituations and touchscreen hardware where theX/Y appearance is not in sync with systemdisplay - i.e. not a calibration issue, but aphysical configuration or device setup situationwhere the perceived touch location issomewhat offset from the hardware/driverestablished touch location. For example, whenthere is a noticeable physical separationbetween the display surface and the touchsensitive glass surface. To accommodate thesesituations, X or Y (or both) parallax settingsmay be entered (positive or negative), andthese values are used as an offset to calculate amodified location within the software tobalance the difference between the user’sviewpoint and its corresponding X/Y touchpoint. Note these settings are used only forlocation values within the area of the

523


My-T-Touch window. These settings shouldonly be used in situations where the user anddevice are consistently located, as thesesettings will make the software appear tooperate incorrectly if the user’s approach to thedevice is varied. Use XParallax=0 andYParallax=0 to bypass these settings.

KeyBlockTime=0

The KeyBlockTime is a per key blockout timein milliseconds where any additional key pressvia click event is ignored (blocked). The settingis implemented per key, but is global in nature.For each processed key, the particular key is is"blocked" during the blockout time specified.However, another key press will clear thecurrent blockout, and start a new blockout timefor the new key. Use KeyBlockTime=0 tobypass this setting. KeyBlockTime=100 means100 milliseconds key block time out.KeyBlockTime=500 means 500 milliseconds

524


(1/2 second) key block time out.

AllowThemeChange=1

The AllowThemeChange setting provides anenable/disable setting for theme changes eithervia the Touch Panel, the My-T-Touch menu, orthe 2-touch Rotate gesture. IfAllowThemeChange=1, then these ThemeChange events are processed, otherwise ifAllowThemeChange=0, then user triggeredtheme changes are not allowed.

Theme=ROUNDED_SLATE

The Theme entry is the current theme in use.This entry must correspond to a folder in theThemesFolder specified folder, and the foldermust have appropriate Theme settings andfiles. The Change Theme event(AllowThemeChange) will rotate the themebased on the ThemeList, and update this entry,then reload the current theme.

525


ThemeList=ROUNDED_SLATE,ROUNDED_BLUE,CIRCLE_GRAY,ROUNDED_GREEN,RESET

This must be a comma delimited list of foldersthat exist as sub-folders in the the specifiedThemesFolder location. When the ChangeTheme event occurs (AllowThemeChange), thenext item in the list will be used as the newcurrent theme, or the list will start over fromthe first entry.

ThemesFolder=%PRODDIR%\THEMES

The ThemesFolder setting must correspond toa valid folder that has at least 1 themesub-folder. The default is%PRODDIR%\THEMES, which expands tothe current installed folder, with a sub-folder ofTHEMES. A valid Theme folder (in theTHEMES folder) will have a THEME.INI,which contains replacement entries for specificitems the current MYTTOUCH.INI file. Whenthe Theme is applied (at My-T-Touch start ordue to Change Theme event), the THEME.INI

526


is read and applied to the currentMYTTOUCH.INI file. For example themes,the PaintDLL overrides are used to change thepainting of the keys, background, etc. Refer tothe Example Themes and the IMG Developer’sKit for more details.

InitTouchPanel=1

This setting is used at the first run-time todetermine if multi-touch hardware capabilitiesare present, and if they are, theWantTouchPanel setting will be set to 1 toshow the Touch Panel. The logic used requiresthat the RegisterTouchWindow API call issuccessful (Multi-touch capable hardware),and the WantMultiTouch or WantGestures isset to 1, and InitTouchPanel=1. This allows theWantTouchPanel setting to sync up withavailable hardware and initial default settings,so the Touch Panel is shown if the system cansupport it, while preserving the meaning of

527


WantTouchPanel based on user preferences.The setting is always set to InitTouchPanel=0after starting My-T-Touch.

WantTouchPanel=0

If WantTouchPanel=1, then the Touch Panelwill be displayed (Windows Vista / 7). Theexternal MultiTouchDLL.DLL must be presentfor support (see IMG Developers’ Kit), andeither WantMultiTouch or WantGestures mustbe set to 1. If WantTouchPanel=0, the TouchPanel will not be shown. If the Touch Panel isshown on a system without Multi-Touchcapabilities, the Theme & Dismiss buttons willstill operate, but gestures and multi-touchbuttons will not be enabled.

WantMultiTouch=0

To select the multi-touch interface, useWantMultiTouch=1. If this value is set, theWantGestures setting will not be used.

528


WantGestures=1

To select the gesture interfaces, useWantGestures=1. To use gestures,WantMultiTouch=0 must be used.

FlicksMode=2

During run-time, if both multi-touch and thegesture interface are off, then normal operationwill occur, and flicks will be processed. TheMultiTouchDLL.DLL must be present, and theTouch Panel must be available. FlicksMode=0will disable flick processing. FlicksMode=1means the keyboard window will be sent to thescreen location relative to the flick, i.e. up(north) means top center, down-left(south-east) means bottom left, etc.FlicksMode=2 means the keyboard windowwill move in the horizontal/vertical directions,and minimize on a diagonal direction.

ReturnOnScreen=0

529


The ReturnOnScreen setting controls how thekeyboard window is positioned when recalledfrom its off-screen position (when dismissedby the Touch Panel’s Clear/Dismiss/Recallbutton). If ReturnOnScreen=0, then the leftposition of the keyboard window is recordedwhen dismissed, and returned to that originalposition when recalled. (Note: If usinggestures, and the keyboard window is pannedoff-screen to the left, then it will return at theleft edge, and if panned off-screen to the right,then it will return at the right edge). IfReturnOnScreen=1, then the keyboard windowis returned to the center of the screen (orprimary monitor in a multi-monitor system). IfReturnOnScreen=2, then the keyboard windowis returned to the center of the entire virtualspace (in a multi-monitor system). If there isonly 1 monitor, then ReturnOnScreen=2 willoperate the same as ReturnOnScreen=1.

530


TouchFadeAway=1

The TouchFadeAway setting indicates how the"on-screen" Touch Panel portion will reactwhen the keyboard window if "off-screen". IfTouchFadeAway=1, then after a preset amountof time (a few seconds), the visible portion ofthe Touch Panel (green section when keyboardwindow off-screen) will fade away. Aclick/touch/mouse event is required to resetand make the window visible. IfTouchFadeAway=0, then the fade away actionis disabled, and the Touch Panel will always bevisible.

(Added in 1.79)

[Region]

The [Region] section is used to create a regionmask that can change the shape of the visiblewindow. For some versions, this sectionreplaces the external REGION.INI file.

531


RoundedCorner=0

When RoundedCorner=0, region masks are notapplied to round the corners of the keyboardwindow. When RoundedCorner=1, 4 ellipses(circles), and 2 rectangles are summed tocreate a rounded corner effect for the keyboardwindow. The circle size (affecting the roundedcorner) is calculated based on the current Sizesetting. If the Region setting UseFixedArea isset, it will override the RoundedCorner setting.Be sure to set UseFixedArea=0 whenRoundedCorner=1.

UseFixedArea=0

Set UseFixedArea=1 to enable the use orspecified areas to create a region mask thataffects the visible portion of the keyboardwindow. To disable these appearance options,set UseFixedArea=0. Also referenceRoundedCorner for a special case of theseappearance settings.

532


Area1=

Area2=

Area3=

Area4=

Area5=

Area6=

Area7=

Area8=

Up to 8 different Areas can be specified whenUseFixedArea=1. For validly specified areas,the different regions will be summed (logicallyOR’ed) to create more complex regions. Theseregions must be set in sequential order, andeach must be valid to properly create acomplex region. The Area entries must be ofthe form "[Type],left,top,right,bottom" where[Type] can be "Rect" or "Ellipse", and left, top,right, bottom are 0,0 based entries from the

533


top/left of the keyboard window. The Rect typeregion is defined by the rectangle areaspecified, where the Ellipse type results in theellipse that will fit within the rectangle areaspecified. (Example: Area1=Rect,3,5,271,109)The areas are not required to be contiguous.The entries are coordinates using the top/left ofthe window as 0,0, and for practical use, theright value must be larger than the left value,and the bottom value must be larger than thetop value. Note these entries are notwidth/height, but absolute coordinates.

534


WarningBe careful when usingthese settings, since thesoftware can be madeunusable orinaccessible if theregion area specifieddoes not map in afunctional/usable way tothe current keyboardwindow configuration.Also, these are pixelsettings based on acurrentsize/configuration -changing the sizeand/or configuration ofMy-T-Touch may resultin an unacceptabledisplay.

535


[MouseButtons]

LeftButton=0

RightButton=2

MiddleButton=3

ShiftDisplay=1

The MouseButtons settings are used to trackwhich actions are triggered by the MouseButton. LeftButton or RightButton must be setto 0 indicating the button that will press aMy-T-Touch button. The valid settings are1-63, referenced as follows:

1=Ignore Button Press, 2=Move My-T-Touch3=Look-Through My-T-Touch, 4=OpenMy-T-Touch Menu, 5=Minimize My-T-Touch,6=Enter Key, 7=Escape Key, 8=Tab Key,9=Space Bar, 10=BackSpace Key,11=Up-Arrow, 12=Down-Arrow,13=Left-Arrow, 14=Right-Arrow, 15=Insert,

536


16=Delete, 17=Home, 18=End, 19=Page Up,20=Page Down, 21=F1 (Help), 22=F2, 23=F3,24=F4, 25=F5, 26=F6, 27=F7, 28=F8, 29=F9,30=F10 (Menu), 31=F11, 32=F12, 33=ShiftKey, 34=Ctrl Key, 35=Alt Key, 36=Ctrl-Ins(Copy), 37=Shift-Ins (Paste), 38=Shift-Del(Cut), 39=Ctrl-Del (Clear), 40=Alt-Backspace(Undo), 41=Alt-F4 (Close Window),42=Alt-Tab (Next App), 43=Alt-Esc (FindApp), 44=Alt-Space (System Menu), 45=Alt-Y(Yes), 46=Alt-N (No), 47=Shift-Tab,48=Shift-F4 (Tile), 49=Shift-F5 (Cascade),50=Ctrl-F4 (Close Child), 51=Ctrl-Tab (SelectChild), 52=Ctrl-Esc (Task List),53=Ctrl-Space, 54=Ctrl-Backspace,55=Ctrl-Enter, 56=Ctrl-Home, 57=Ctrl-End,58=Ctrl-Page Up, 59=Ctrl-Page Down,60=Ctrl-Up, 61=Ctrl-Down, 62=Ctrl-Left,63=Ctrl-Right

The ShiftDisplay is included for those users

537


who use the Shift key as one of their buttons -My-T-Touch repaints the shifted keys when theShift state is on (Shift-Key Down), and there isa slight delay on slower systems. To alleviatethis delay, you may set ShiftDisplay=0.

[StartUp]

QuickHelp=1

Magnifier=1

Calc=0

Alpha=1

Edit=1

Numeric=1

Window=1

Info=1

MacroBrd=0

MytCtl=1

538


(Added in 1.77)

MyTMPanel=1

The StartUp settings are used to indicate whichMy-T-Touch Panels will open at My-T-Touchstartup. If these are changed, My-T-Touchconfiguration will change and then open in thenew configuration from then on.

These settings can be manipulated thru theCONFGMTS utility (ConfigureMTS), thefollowing indicates the relationship to theavailable panels in My-T-Touch:

Alpha - Keyboard panel (letters, function keys)

Edit - Edit Panel (arrow keys, edit keys)

Numeric - Numeric Keypad panel

Window - Windows Controls panel

MacroBrd - Macro panel

Magnifier - Magnifier panel

539


Calc - Calculator panel

QuickHelp - QuickHelp panel

Info - System Information panel

MytCtl - Control panel

MyTMPanel - Tool bar panel

[SysInfo]

Time=1

Date=1

CurPos=1

FreeDsk=1

FreeMem=1

FreeRes=1

Order=TDMSRC

The settings Time, Date, CurPos, FreeDsk,FreeMem, FreeRes indicate if the display isshown.

540


The Order indicates which order theinformation is displayed.

The relationships are as follows:

Time, Order T, Current System Time.

Date, Order D, Current System Date.

CurPos, Order C, Current Cursos Position.

FreeDsk, Order S, Free Disk Space.

FreeMem, Order M, Free System Memory.

FreeRes, Order R, Free System Resources.

(Added in 1.77)

TimeDisplayNoSeconds=0

This setting was requested by a My-T-TouchTS user to reduce network traffic when usingthe time display on the System Informationpanel. When TimeDisplayNoSeconds=1,instead of hours, minutes & seconds(HH:MM:SS), the display is hours & minutes

541


(HH:MM), and the update occurs only once 1minute, instead of once a second.

[CalculatorTape]

CalcTapeActive=1

OpenTapeWithCalc=0

CalcSendWithCR=0

CalcSendWithEXE=0

Program=

DecimalDigits=6

CalcTapeActive=1 indicates that the CalculatorTape can be activated from the CalculatorPanel. When the Calculator Panel opens, theBack Space is changed to indicate "Tape." Ifclicked, the Calculator Tape will open. At anytime, by clicking on the Display, the CalculatorTape will open, or if already open, will close.When the Calculator Panel is closed, theCalculator Tape will automatically close. If

542


CalcTapeActive=0, these features will not beavailable. As an alternative, ifOpenTapeWithCalc=1, the Calculator Tapewill open when the Calculator Panel is open. IfCalcSendWithCR=1, the [Enter] Key will beappended to the keystrokes sent when the SD(Send) button is clicked on the CalculatorPanel. If CalcSendWithEXE=1, the applicationspecified with the Program= setting will belaunched when the SD (Send) button is clickedon the Calculator Panel. Program= is used tospecify the path & file name of the executableprogram to launch whenCalcSendWithEXE=1. Only short file names isrecommended for maximum compatibility.DecimalDigits sets the number of digits thatthe My-T-Touch calculator will display to theright of the decimal place. Valid settings are 1through 6.

[Colors]

543


Display3DKeys=1

If Display3DKeys=1, then the shaded bitmap isused as a background for the keys - this isrecommended for 16-bit color or higher (256colors is not sufficient) Set Display3DKeys=0to disable the high-resolution display.

Note for sizes smaller than 8, the high-res isnot supported because there are not enoughpixels to create an acceptable look.

SystemColors=0

If SystemColors=0, then the following sectiondefines the colors available for the differentpanels. If SystemColors=1, then the colors areretreived from the Windows System, as setupin Display Properties, Appearance.

Colors are RGB values, listed RRR,GGG,BBB.If your monitor displays more than 16 colors,you may adjust these values here & avoid theColors Options in My-T-Touch Setup.

544


ToolTextIn=0,0,0

Color of the Control Panel text if the Panelindicated is not displayed

ToolTextOut=0,0,255

Color of the Control Panel text if the Panelindicated is displayed

Text1=0,0,0

Face1=192,192,192

High1=255,255,255

Shadow1=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Magnifier Panel.

Text2=0,0,0

Face2=192,192,192

High2=255,255,255

Shadow2=128,128,128

545


Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Keyboard Panel.

Text3=0,0,0

Face3=192,192,192

High3=255,255,255

Shadow3=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Edit Panel.

Text4=0,0,0

Face4=192,192,192

High4=255,255,255

Shadow4=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Numeric Panel.

Text5=0,0,128

Face5=192,192,192

546


High5=255,255,255

Shadow5=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Windows ControlsPanel.

Text6=128,0,0

Face6=192,192,192

High6=255,255,255

Shadow6=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Macro Panel.

Text7=0,0,0

Face7=192,192,192

High7=255,255,255

Shadow7=128,128,128

547


Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Calculator Panel.

SysT=255,255,255

System Information: Time

SysD=0,255,255

System Information: Date

SysC=255,255,0

System Information: Cursor Position

SysS=255,0,0

System Information: Disk Space

SysM=255,0,255

System Information: System MemoryAvailable

SysR=0,255,0

System Information: System Resources

SysQ=0,255,0548


Quick Help Display

Sys#=0,255,0

Calculator Display

CalcMem=255,255,0

Calculator Memory indicator

[Help]

This is a lookup section to map internal helptopics to various external help manifestations.During the 19 years of releases, various helpformats have been introduced and then madeobsolete. Currently HTML and PDF are in use,as the most flexible and platform independent,in hopes that they might last a bit longer thanWindows only help formats. This is used bythe HelpInterface function in IMGVERS.DLL,and should not be modified by the user. Notethat the INI file in the same folder asIMGVERS.DLL is used for this lookup. If help

549


reports a problem with the help file, verifyingthe INI in the installation folder and thissection may be helpful.

THE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIFICAPPLICATIONS IN WHICH My-T-TouchREQUIRES SPECIAL SETTINGS

Certain Windows Applications may be affectedby My-T-Touch because of the way they werewritten. You may set My-T-Touch to actnormally for any application by setting theConfiguration in My-T-Touch Setup or editingthe MYTTOUCH.INI file.

[Special]

MyTSpcl0000=Command Prompt

MyTSpcl0001=CMD.EXE

IMPORTANT: Because of the revised interfaceapproach, and the general improvement inquality of all windows software, many of these

550


capabilities & settings are no longer necessary.In fact, the settings included are for examplepurposes only and they are not required forproper operation of the windowed commandprompt. Because these advanced specialhandling capabilities add a great deal offlexibility to the software, all documentationand notes remain.

The Special area designates which applicationsrequire special consideration by My-T-Touch.These are used internally and should not bemodified by the user here. Refer toMy-T-Touch Setup to add, remove, or modifythese settings.

The following MyTSpcl????= lists theapplication name that My-T-Touch will checkin the application section below for any specialsettings. This application name is the WindowText (Caption Heading) for the Window. Toadd an application to this list, it must be

551


assigned the next sequential number forMyTSpcl????.

ADVANCED NOTES:

The Special settings are used internally byMy-T-Touch to handle the vagaries of differentWindows applications - they are documentedhere in case of similar problems with otherWindows applications.

SPECIAL SETTINGS

Special=1 - is used to track internal windowchild controls for Edit, Buttons, List boxes,Scroll bars, etc. - No application should setSpecial=1.

Special=2 - this is for Paintbrush and the factthat it loses the input focus and DOES NOTregain it if another application is activatedwhile text is being entered. This may not beuseful in any other application because of thespecific internal windows messages handled

552


with this setting - if, however, an application iswritten in the same way, and My-T-Touch isunable to send keystrokes to that application,the user may wish to try this setting for thatapplication. NOTE: This only applies ifInterfaceApproach=0

Special=3 is used internally to handle thedifferences between Help in version 3.0 and3.1.

Special=4 was used to handle the edit areas inthe PIF editor for the main window. Thissetting is specific to the PIF editor, and will notwork in any other cases. TheInterfaceApproach=1 setting has eliminated theneed for this special action. PIF editor will notact properly if InterfaceApproach=0.

Special=5 is used to bring the Task Windowover My-T-Touch in version 3.0 and handlespecial screen repaint issues - this is specific tothe Task List.

553


Action Settings:

Action=0 - ignore

Action=1 - minimize to button

Action=2 - minimize to icon

Action=3 - hide My-T-Touch behind Windowas an icon

Action=4 - move My-T-Touch off of Window

Action=5 - resize Window, move My-T-Touchoff

Action=6 - Dialog Type Window - MoveMy-T-Touch to bottom

Action=7 - Popup Type Window (Help) - MoveWindow off of My-T-Touch

Flags=1 - Window receives Focus

Flags=2 - Window does not get Input Focus

Action=8 - Screen Saver - My-T-Touch floats

554


Action=9 - Screen Saver - My-T-Touchbounces

Action=10 - My-T-Touch hides

Action=11 - 29 (RESERVED)

Action=30 - Use Secondary Strategy Win 3.0Only

Action=31 - Use Secondary Strategy Win 3.1Only

Action=32 - Use Secondary Strategy Always

The Flags entry is also checked for allowing aButton Move to a particular class of windows.For example, if Action=0 and Flags=1 for aparticular class, this class will be ignored,AND the button will not move to this class ofwindow. Essentially the Flags setting shouldonly be used for Action=7 as outlined above,or set Flags=1 to prevent the button frommoving to this class of window.

555


[Command Prompt]

Contention=1

Action=4

[CMD.EXE]

Contention=1

Action=4

[Classes]

MyTClass0000=#32770

MyTClass0001=bordlg

MyTClass0002=Dialog

MyTClass0003=MS_WINNOTE

MyTClass0004=tutor

MyTClass0005=tutprogman

MyTClass0006=tutwrite

MyTClass0007=ListBox

556


MyTClass0008=ComboBox

MyTClass0009=ComboLBox

MyTClass0010=WFS_Drives

MyTClass0011=WFS_Drive

MyTClass0012=WindowsScreenSaverClass

MyTClass0013=Sleep

MyTClass0014=FXPopup

MyTClass0015=C_TurboType

MyTClass0016=bosa_sdm_Microsoft Word6.0

MyTClass0017=bosa_sdm_XL

MyTClass0018=LOGON

MyTClass0019=Blank Screen Saver

MyTClass0020=My-T-Soft Ctrl-Alt-Del

MyTClass0021=tooltips_class32

557


MyTClass0022=Button

[#32770]

Action=6

[bordlg]

Action=6

[Dialog]

Action=6

[MS_WINNOTE]

Action=7

Flags=1

[tutor]

Action=10

[tutprogman]

Action=10

[tutwrite]

558


Action=10

[ListBox]

Action=31

[ComboBox]

Action=32

[ComboLBox]

Action=31

[WFS_Drives]

Action=30

[WFS_Drive]

Action=30

[WindowsScreenSaverClass]

Action=10

[Sleep]

Action=10

559


[FXPopup]

Action=10

[C_TurboType]

Action=7

Flags=2

[bosa_sdm_Microsoft Word 6.0]

Action=6

[bosa_sdm_XL]

Action=6

[LOGON]

Action=10

[Blank Screen Saver]

Action=10

[My-T-Soft Ctrl-Alt-Del]

Action=6

560


[tooltips_class32]

Action=0

Flags=1

[Button]

Action=0

Flags=1

ADVANCED NOTES:

The Classes listed here are the classes thatMy-T-Touch must act in special ways.Primarily this list is referenced internallyduring My-T-Touch operation against theactive window. If a match is found, the actionMy-T-Touch will take is given by the action.

IMPORTANT: Each Class on this list willaffect the system memory that My-T-Touchrequires, and will affect the system operationspeed within Windows since this list must bechecked against the active window. There is no

561


reason to remove any of the entries on this list,and if you do, proper operation of My-T-Touchcannot be ensured.

If My-T-Touch does not act the way you wantit to act, cross check the My-T-Touch actionslisted above, and if applicable, add the classand action to the list, as documented below inthe example for screen savers.

NOTE: Screen Savers.

The main reason to add to this list would be toadd a screen saver that you use which is notcurrently on the list. To add an entry: Add theNext sequential entry to the [Classes] section.

e.g.

MyTClass0028=MyScreenSaver

and then add an entry below it as:

[MyScreenSaver]

Action=10562


This will result in My-T-Touch hiding behindthe screen saver when the screen saverbecomes active.

NOTE: Reference the actions above foralternate screen saver actions.

Reference the ClassWatch setting in the[Configuration] \section to find out the class ofthe active window.

[MenuClasses]

MyTClass0000=#32768

MyTClass0001=BaseBar

MyTClass0002=MsoCommandBarPopup

MyTClass0003=DV2ControlHost

These settings have been added to allowadditions of application defined menus.Windows 98 added to the original Popupmenuclass with the BaseBar, and Office 97 addedthe MsoCommandBarPopup. Since these

563


menus work better when displayed aboveMy-T-Touch, internal settings & action allowthe classes of windows in this list to appearabove My-T-Touch. There is a maximum of 10classes that can be entered in this list.

[StayBehindClasses]

MyTClass0000=The Magnifier

MyTClass0001=CrossScanner FingerScan

MyTClass0002=CrossScanner Desktop

MyTClass0003=Defer:WordComplete

These settings have been added to providemore flexibility for handling other windows inthe system. Because the MenuClasses settingare used for Menus and can affect focus issues,an additional setting for other interfacewindows that affect the windows display orderhas been added. My-T-Touch will not positionabove (visibly on top) of these windows. The

564


"Defer:" prefix indicates a modified logicapproach internally, so that when the mouse ispositioned in the overlap between the keyboardwindow and the indicated deferred window, anoverride state occurs. When the mouse slidesonto the keyboard window in this state, thekeyboard will then stay above the indicatedwindow class. This lasts until the mousepointer goes off the keyboard window. Thisallows a flexible approach, designedspecifically for the WordComplete window,which stays topmost, unless the user wants totype a letter, which can be accomplished bysliding off the deferred window onto thekeyboard, bringing the keyboard on top of the(otherwise) topmost window. There can beonly 1 Defer entry in this list.

Important Note: The StayBehindClassesarea ONLY refers to other windows thathave the Topmost attribute in the system.

565


This cannot be used for normal typewindows. The Window manager sortsmultiple Topmost windows, which in allcases will be above other non-topmostwindows. The StayBehindClasses is usedto help sort these topmost windows. Inorder to position the topmost My-T-Touchwindow below some application window,the application window must also have theTopmost attribute. For application levelcontrol of the keyboard window, refer toIMG’s Build-A-Board.

(OnScreen only)

[DoNotArrangeClasses]

maximum 32 characters

MyTClass0000=CrossScanner

MyTClass0001=MyTSetup

MyTClass0002=Shell_TrayWnd566


MyTClass0003=Calculator Tape

MyTClass0004=The Magnifier

MyTClass0005=The Right Touch

MyTClass0006=TouchRight Utilities

MyTClass0007=ScrlCtrl

MyTClass0008=DV2ControlHost

MyTClass0009=SmartClick

MyTClass0010=WorkerW

MyTClass0011=SysListView32

MyTClass0012=ImlWinCls

MyTClass0013=CrossScanner Cursor Park

These settings have been added to allowadditions of applications that the user does notwant to be Auto-arranged whenAutoArrange=1 - (see above for this setting).Because certain OnScreen & CrossScannerwindows should not be affected by

567


Auto-Arrange when enabled, this list providesthe list of window classes that will not bearranged.

[MacroPanelsToOpen]

The default setting is to have no panelsautomatically open. The list that would appearhere is appended to the Window Names in thespecial MyTSpcl????= list above.

NOTE: If MacroPanelsToOpen includes one ofthe Special settings windows names, only theSpecial Settings will work & the Macro Panelwill not open.

IMPORTANT: Each Panel on this list willaffect the system memory that My-T-Touchrequires, and will affect the system operationspeed within Windows since this list must bechecked against the active window.

The list is built fromOpenPanel????=MAC?????.KMF entries.

568


Example:

OpenPanel0000=MAC00032.KMF



where OpenPanel???? entries must be insequential order starting at 0000. The numbersmust be sequential. The Macro File name withID embedded in the name must be the entry.

Since there is no easy way to view the MacroPanel at the file level, these settings should behandled within My-T-Touch Setup.

[Keys]

MyTKeys0000=78,16384

The [Keys] section lists a sequential list of keyIDs and enhanced settings code. The firstnumber in the list is the key ID for eachMyTKeys???? entry, and the second number(after the comma) lists the enhanced settings

569


ID. See BUILD-A-MACRO notes above forthe Key IDs list.

The MyTKeys???? must be sequential startingat MyTKeys0000. e.g. Additional entries to theabove would be

MyTKeys0001=1,1

MyTKeys0002=12,64

The Enhanced setting is a binary code(decimally displayed) that is set as follows:

Enable/Disable is 1-128

Launch is 256-32768

For any particular key, the bits are "or"-ed, orsummed as follows

0 - Key enabled

+1 Disable Keystroke

+2 Disable Shift + Keystroke

+4 Disable Ctrl + Keystroke570


+8 Disable Alt + Keystroke

+16 Disable Alt-Shift + Keystroke

+32 Disable Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke

+64 Disable Alt-Ctrl + Keystroke

+128 Disable Alt-Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke

+256 Launch with Keystroke

+512 Launch with Shift + Keystroke

+1024 Launch with Ctrl + Keystroke

+2048 Launch with Alt + Keystroke

+4096 Launch with Alt-Shift + Keystroke

+8192 Launch with Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke

+16384 Launch with Alt-Ctrl + Keystroke

+32768 Launch with Alt-Ctrl-Shift +Keystroke

The above setting for MyTKeys0000 is for theDelete Key (with Ctrl and the Alt key pressed)

571


to launch the Key EXE below (for Key0078).The utility will force Windows to restart, soCtrl-Alt-Delete on the keyboard will result in awarm reboot. When the Logon Utilities areenabled in Windows 2000 / XP, a Ctrl-Alt-Delwill perform the same result as if done on aphysical keyboard, e.g. show a dialog in thesecure WinLogon desktop. In WindowsVista/7, a separate set of buttons will bedisplayed on the user desktop, allowing similarfunctionality to the WinLogon options shownif a Ctrl-Alt-Del is performed by a physicalkeyboard (the GINA interface has beendropped by Microsoft in Windows Vista/7, sotransferring to the secure WinLogon desktopdoes not occur). Options include: LockWorkstation/Switch User, Log Off, Restart,Shutdown, and the Task Manager.

[Key0078]

Program=%PRODDIR%\CTALTDEL.EXE572


NOTE: This assumes the default install on anormal windows setup - it is included primarilyfor example. Each Key ID can have 1 Key EXEassociated with it, and 1 or more keycombinations can launch this EXE based onthe MyTKeys???? setting above in [Keys].

Note that the Enable/Disable portion of akeystroke is independent of its Launch setting.The Keystroke should be initiated prior to thelaunch of the EXE, but system & Windowsissues may affect this timing. The path & filename conform to "short" file names forbackwards compatibility. Make sure you do notuse Long file names in the path.

Developer’s Kit Notes: The followingsections are NOT in the default INI asshipped with the product, but since theyare valid & available entries, they arebriefly listed here for reference. Forcomplete coverage, entry information, and

573


further details on these sections, pleaserefer to the Developer’s Kit documentation.

AddOnDLL sections

There are 3 possible sections available -[AddOnDLL1], [AddOnDLL2],[AddOnDLL3]. Only a single section is listedhere. The Developer’s Kit covers a sampleAddOnDLL, along with a Logging Log DLLusing these capabilities.

[AddOnDLL1]

DLLName=%PRODDIR%ADDONDLL\ADDON.dll

InitializeFunctionName=InitFuncType7

InitializeFunctionType=7

TimerFunctionName=TimerFuncType9

TimerFunctionType=9

TimerDelay=1000574


CleanupFunctionName=CleanupFuncType8

CleanupFunctionType=8

Value1=1

Value2=201

Value3=3302

PaintDLL section

The Paint DLL allows an external DLL tohandle certain painting tasks withinMy-T-Touch, allowing customization to thepanel background, and the keys (both keybackground image and key label) Refer to theDeveloper’s Kit for details and a sample DLLthat shows some custom painted images.

[PaintDLL]

DLLName=%PRODDIR%\PaintDLL\Release\PaintDLL.DLL

PaintFrame=1

PaintFrameFunc=PaintDLLPaintFrame575


PaintKey=0

PaintKeyFunc=PaintDLLPaintKey

PaintKeyBackground=1

PaintKeyBackgroundFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyBackground

PaintKeyModBackground=0

PaintKeyModBackgroundFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyModBackground

PaintKeyLabel=1

PaintKeyLabelFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyLabel

WordsDLL section

The Words DLL allows an external DLL tohandle Word List functionality when theWordComplete panel is available. Refer to theDeveloper’s Kit for details and a sample DLLthat shows the integration.

[WordsDLL]

DLLName=%PRODDIR%\WordsDLL\Release\WordsDLL.DLL

576


WordsGetWordListFunc=GetWordList

WordsTypedWordFunc=TypedWord

577

Chapter 11. ErrorMessages and Numbers

My-T-Touch Errors & Notes are listed is thissection describing details and possibleresolutions.

My-T-Touch Error MessagesMy-T-Touch Errors & Notes are listed belowalphabetically with the following information:

Internal Error Codes

Explanations

Possible Solutions to resolve the problem

If you are unable to resolve the problem andrequire technical support please write down the

578

Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers

error code and refer to the Customer Supportsection of this manual.

My-T-Touch is Already Open! Cannot OpenAnother...

Internal Code: 1

Explanation: My-T-Touch is already running.

Solutions: My-T-Touch should be visiblesomewhere on your screen display - it may beminimized to a button or icon.

If using the Developer’s Kit, if is possible thatMy-T-Touch is open, but off-screen, and notaccessible - you can try going to a higherresolution (Control Panel | Display | Settings,and raise the resolution (e.g. 800x600 to1024x768)). You can also use theCLOSEMTS.EXE from the Developer’s Kit toforce My-T-Touch to close. If you haveconfigured My-T-Touch to open off-screen,you may run My-T-Touch Setup |

579


Configuration | Special Options | Return toInstallation Defaults. You may also tryMOVEWMTS.EXE to move back on thevisible screen, then Save Settings & SavePosition. Refer to Developer’s Kit notes forfurther details.

My-T-Touch Initialization Error! Cannotaccess My-T-Touch Initialization File:MYTTOUCH.INI

Internal Code: 39

Explanation: My-T-Touch could not access theMYTTOUCH.INI file.

Solutions: The My-T-Touch Initialization file isnot in the Installation directory. You can runMy-T-Touch Setup from the Program ManagerMy-T-Touch group, selectConfiguration-Special-Return To InstallationDefaults, and select Yes, then retryMy-T-Touch.

580


My-T-Touch Initialization Error! Cannotaccess My-T-Touch Keyboard File:KEYBOARD.KBF

Internal Codes: 4, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90,91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 97

Explanation: My-T-Touch could not access theKEYBOARD.KBF file.

Solutions: If My-T-Touch cannot access theKEYBOARD.KBF file located in theMy-T-Touch Installation Directory,My-T-Touch cannot be run. You may wish toexit Windows, restart, and retry. If this does notwork, you will have to re-install My-T-Touchfrom diskette.

Internal Codes: 84, 89, 96

Explanation: The KEYBOARD.KBF file iscorrupt.

Solutions: You can try to restore the original

581


files by going into My-T-Touch Setup |Configuration (Appearance [Advanced]) |Special Options and select Return toInstallation defaults, or you will need tore-install My-T-Touch.

My-T-Touch File Error! Cannot accessMy-T-Touch Macro File: MAC?????.KMFor Keyboard Macro file KYBD????.KMF

Internal Code: 98, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112,113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118

Explanation: My-T-Touch could not access thefile listed in the Error message.

Solutions: You may have deleted the MacroFile listed, and the Macro Panel is notavailable. Check all Macro Key assignments toverify that none are attempting to open anon-existent Macro Panel. There may be somesystem or permissions issue that is preventingaccess to the file - you can try as an

582


Administrator to see if results are different.You should verify the installation (orre-install).

There is not enough System MemoryAvailable for My-T-Touch to run in thisConfiguration. Consult Your Manual.

Internal Code: 103

Explanation: There is not enough WindowsGlobal Memory available to operateMy-T-Touch in the current configuration.

Solutions: You may try to increase SystemMemory available to all applications withinWindows, or operate My-T-Touch in a smallerconfiguration and/or size. My-T-Touch requiresmore System Memory as the screen displayarea increases. As you open Panels or go to alarger size, the demand increases. You may tryto increase the system memory by increasingthe Windows Swap File (see Virtual Memory

583


under 386 Enhanced in the Windows ControlPanel), or physically adding more memory toyour system.

This is a Single User Version of My-T-Touch.Please Contact Innovation ManagementGroup, Inc. for Multi-User Licensing.

Internal Code: 101

Explanation: This is a Single User Version.

Solutions: Contact Innovation ManagementGroup, Inc. regarding Multi-User and SiteLicensing of My-T-Touch.

Too many clocks or timers! Close SomeWindows or Stop Animations, then Retry.

Internal Code: 3

Explanation: There is not a System Timeravailable

Solutions: You can close some windows, orstop any animations, or try exiting Windows

584


and restart.

Window Creation Error! Cannot continue!Check System and Try again.

Internal Code: 1

Explanation: Windows could not create aWindow for My-T-Touch

Solutions: You may have too many windowsopen, and there are not enough resources, orthe Windows Environment may have beencorrupted, or some other system error. EitherClose other windows and try again, or exitWindows, and restart.

Window Tracking Error. Close My-T-Touchand Restart.

Internal Code: 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005

Explanation: InterfaceApproach is set to 0 inMYTTOUCH.INI and there has been aninternal error in My-T-Touch.

585


Solutions: Close My-T-Touch, and reset theInterfaceApproach in the MYTTOUCH.INI to1, then restart My-T-Touch.

Windows Internal Controls Are Active inActive Window! Cannot RemoveMy-T-Touch! Close Active Window orSwitch to Another Window, then Retry.

Internal Code 1000:

Explanation: InterfaceApproach is set to 0 inMYTTOUCH.INI, and Windows InternalControls have been subclassed

Solution: Close Active Window, or Switch toAnother Window and retry.

Windows Global Memory Allocation Error!Close My-T-Touch and Restart.

Internal Codes: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26,27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,

586


40, 99. 100, DLL

Explanation: My-T-Touch attempted to Lockor Allocate Global Memory, and received anerror code from Windows.

Solutions: See Solutions under "There is notenough System Memory..." above.

Windows Local Memory Allocation Error!Close My-T-Touch and Restart.

Internal Codes: 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49,50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61,62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73,74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 102, 104, 105,106, 107, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123

Explanation: My-T-Touch is unable to accessLocal Memory to My-T-Touch. You shouldnever see this error.

Solutions: Close My-T-Touch and Restart. Ifthat is not successful, Exit Windows and

587


Restart.

588

Index

Symbols101Keyboard, 77104Keyboard, 772-ButtonMouse, 2302037 / 2038yearlimitation,3283-ButtonMouse, 2303D KeyDisplay, 122

AABCKeyboard,171

About thisproduct, 284

ActionButton, 229

Action ButtonMove, 131

ActionPanel -INI setting,452

ActionPanelEnabled- INI setting,458

ActivateKeystrokeMacro, 203

589

Index

ActiveApplication(ActiveWindow), 77Add A Panel,198Add/RemovePrograms, 5,25AdditionalKeyboardNotes, 174addresses, 197Administrator,26, 107AdministratorRights, 238,241AdvancedUser Notes,263

Allow ActionButton Move,131AllowFrameMove- INI setting,424AllowGrayedKey- INI setting,480AllowReadOnlyOperation- INI setting,487AllowThemeChange- INI setting,525Alt Keyoperation, 78AlternateVirtualInterface, 131AltGr, 173

590

Index

AltGr Keyoperation, 78AltGrLock -INI setting,521AltLock - INIsetting, 521Application(Launch fromMacro Key),214ApplicationNotes, 276Area(Area1,Area2,Area3,etc.)- INI setting,532Auto Logon,256Auto-Open(Macro

Panel), 87AutoArrange -INI setting,455AutoArrangeActive- INI setting,456AutoCapI -INI setting,454AutomaticKeystrokes,128AutomaticLogon, 241,256AutomaticTyping, 128AutomaticU -INI setting,453

591

Index

AutoSaveMove- INI setting,457AutoSpace -INI setting,453AutoSpaceDisable- INI setting,454

Bbackground,70Background(Keyboard),163BackgroundColor- INI setting,402

BIOS, 58border, 125Border - Key,133BorderNoHit -INI setting,426Build-A-Board,334Build-A-Board layoutsupport, 364Build-A-Macro,197Build-A-Macro Notes,335Button(Minimize to

592

Index

button)PositionOptions, 397

ButtonDisplay, 367

ButtonIgnoreWindowXY- INI setting,401

ButtonOffsetX- INI setting,395

ButtonOffsetY- INI setting,395

ButtonOverrideH- INI setting,397

ButtonOverrideW- INI setting,397

ButtonOverrideX- INI setting,399

ButtonOverrideY- INI setting,399

ButtonSingleMonitorLimit- INI setting,402

CCalc(Calculatorpanel), 75

calculatordisplay, 89

CalculatorPanel, 88

593

Index

Calculatorsection [Cal-culatorTape](INI file), 542

CalculatorTape, 89

Caps Locksetting, 436

CapsLockMode- INI setting,438

CaptionWatch- INI setting,395

Caret (textcursor), 77

Catalog, 62

CD(CD-ROM orDVD), 1, 21

Center - INIsetting, 405

CenterOversize- INI setting,477

Certificate ofAuthenticity,1, 21

ChangeTheme(menu), 108

CheckFloppies- INI setting,411

CheckMinMax- INI setting,412

Classessection[Classes] (INIfile), 556

594

Index

ClassWatch -INI setting,413

Clear Key(Macro), 215

Click (Soundfeedback),372

Close(CalculatorTape), 89

Close (ChildWindow), 80

Close (Exit),104

Close (Exit)(Quit), 75

Close (My-T-Touch),104

Close(Panels), 75Close (Toolbar), 72CLOSE(Window), 80Close a panel,75ColorsDialog, 159Colors section[Colors] (INIfile), 543CommandLine Options,348CommonlyAskedQuestions, 50ConfigPath -INI setting,

595

Index

384

Configuration- Special, 369

ConfigurationDialog, 116

Configurationsection [Con-figuration](INI file), 384

ConfigureAutomaticLogon, 256

Configureyour MouseButtons, 229

ContactingIMG, 283

Contention -INI setting,387

context menu,272ContextSensitiveHelp, 115Control Keyoperation, 78Control Panel,75ControlLock -INI setting,520ControlLogo -INI setting,420ControlPanel -INI setting,423ControlPanelKeyboard- INI setting,423

596

Index

ControlPanelToggleButtons- INI setting,474Copy (Macroediting), 223Copy(WindowsControlPanel), 80Copy Key(Macro), 215Copyrights, 9CreateKeystrokeMacro, 203CrossScanner- INI setting,478CrossScannersection[CrossScan-

ner] (INI file),478CTRL+ALT+DELLogon Utility,245CurrentSettings, 102Cursor (dis-play/selecting),233Cursor(MagnifierPanel), 93Cursor (withinMagnifier),126Cursor - INIsetting, 391Cursors, 234Custom Logo,152

597

Index

CustomerService, 60CustomerSuggestions,290CustomerSupport, 60Cut (Macroediting), 223Cut (WindowsControlPanel), 80

DDate (SystemInformationpanel), 91DebuggingOptions -

MYT-TOUCH.INI,413Default LogonName, 257DefaultPassword, 257Default UserName, 257DefaultDrive -INI setting,411Delete (Macroediting), 223Delete MacroPanel, 207Delete Panel,198DeploymentInformation,321

598

Index

DeveloperUtilities, 304Developers,283Dialogs (reactto), 127Display, 51DisplayCursor (withinMagnifier),126DisplayNotes, 367DisplayOptions, 122DisplayChangeEnabled- INI setting,484Document AllMacro Panels,210

Document AllPanels, 198DocumentMacro Panel,209

Post toClipboard,209Save toFile, 209

DocumentPanel, 198DocumentationFile Save, 211DoNotArrangesection[DoNotAr-range] (INIfile), 566DOSWindows, 332

599

Index

DragMode -INI setting,440Drivers, 59DriveTypesToCheck- INI setting,411DVD(CD-ROM orDVD), 1, 21Dvoraklayout, 171DwellTime -INI setting,460

EEdit (edit(keyboard)

panel), 75Edit(KeyboardPanel), 77EditingMacros, 204Editor - INIsetting, 423EGA Users,327Enable AutoLogon, 257EnableDwell -INI setting,460EnableMouseScroll- INI setting,475EnableOperator- INI setting,418

600

Index

EnableScan -INI setting,495EnableScreenScroll- INI setting,476equipment, 20ErrorMessages andNumbers, 578EvaulationLicense, 35ExampleMacro Panels,87Exit (Close),104Exit (Close)(Quit), 75ExpandAKey- INI setting,

471ExpandAKeyFactor- INI setting,472

FFast UserSwitching,370Features, 17File Notes,293Files -Product FilesInstalled, 293Final ReleaseNotes, 265Find (ChildWindow), 80

601

Index

FIND(Window), 80Flicks, 94FlicksMode -INI setting,529focus (activewindow), 77Fonts, 166ForceUnHook- INI setting,427four functioncalculator, 88

GGestures, 94Guide(Using), 10

Hhard diskspace, 20

hardwarerequirements,20

Help, 101

Help(accessing),115

Help (QuickHelp panel),75

Help section[Help] (INIfile), 549

Hide Keys(Show &Hide), 123

602

Index

HideZoomWindow- INI setting,472

HoldShiftCtrl- INI setting,440

IIcon (dis-play/selecting),233

Icon - INIsetting, 393

Icons, 235

IgnoreSystemCapsLock- INI setting,436

IMG, 28, 30

ImportantUserInformation,10

incompatibilities,272

Info (SystemInformationpanel), 75

InformationDisplay(SystemInformationPanel), 157

InformationPanel, 90

Informationpanel(display), 121

INI - FileDocumenta-

603

Index

tion(MYT-TOUCH.INI),382

InitializationFile Docu-mentation(MYT-TOUCH.INI),382

InitTouchPanel- INI setting,527

InnovationManagementGroup, Inc.,60

input device,272

Input Deviceoptions, 132

Install

Installing,4, 24

Installing /Un-Installing,21

Install -Silent, 313

InstallDeveloper’sKit, 28

InstallationInformation,313

InstallPath -INI setting,424

InterfaceSettings, 134

604

Index

Internal ErrorCodes, 578International(keyboard)operation, 78Internationalkeyboard, 173InternationalKeyboardLayouts andWindows, 179IntlWordComplete- INI setting,451Invisible(Cursor), 234

JJoysticks, 59

KKBF Files,334

Key Border,133

Key Click,372

Key Display,367

Key EXE, 143

Key Options,120, 138

KeyBlockTime- INI setting,524

Keyboard

PhysicalKeyboard,58

605

Index

Keyboard -INI setting,407

KeyboardBackground,163

Keyboarddisplay(Fonts), 166

KeyboardLayouts, 170

KeyboardLayouts andWindows, 179

KeyboardLogon, 243

KeyboardNotes, 330

KeyboardPanel, 77

KeyboardPanels (al-pha/edit/numeric),77

KeyboardSelect dialog,170

Keyboard1SizeAdjBase- INI setting,432

Keyboard1SizeAdjLarge- INI setting,432

Keyboard1SizeAdjMedium- INI setting,432

KeyboardCharSetBase- INI setting,432

KeyboardCharSetLarge- INI setting,

606

Index

432KeyboardCharSetMedium- INI setting,432KeyboardEnabled- INI setting,459KeyboardFile- INI setting,450KeyboardFontBase- INI setting,432KeyboardFontLarge- INI setting,432KeyboardFontMedium- INI setting,432KeyboardUpdate- INI setting,

432KeyDelay -INI setting,390Keys

Alt-Backspace,80Alt-Esc, 80Alt-F4, 80,123Alt-Space,80Alt-Tab,330Control-Tab,80Ctrl-Alt-Del,330

607

Index

Ctrl-Break,330Pause Key,54, 330PrintScreenKey, 54,330Shift-F10,80, 330Sys-Rq,330

Keys - specialkeyboardkeys, 330Keys section[Keys] (INIfile), 569KeysOnlyAssist- INI setting,481

KeysOnlyAssistNumbers- INI setting,481

Keystroke(sequence,down and up),129

Keystroke persingle click,129

Keystrokescript(macro), 197

Keystrokesequence(macro), 86,197

Keystrokes(Automatic),128

608

Index

KeyWatch -INI setting,413

KMF Files,334

KoreanWindows IMEUsage, 370

Kybd(Keyboardpanel), 75

Llanguage(Keyboardlayout), 172

LaunchApplication

(Macro Key),214

Launch KeyEXE, 141

Layout(internationalkeyboards),78

Layouts(keyboards),170

Left Button(actionbutton), 229

Left-Hand(cursor), 233

LetterAssist -INI setting,479

letters, 197609

Index

License Key,1, 21, 30LicenseManager, 30Licensing, 30LicensingInformation,28Logo(Custom),121, 152Logon -Automatic,256LOGONFolder, 246LogonUtilities, 124

AdministratorRights,238, 241

Build-A-BoardLayouts,244

CTRL+ALT+DELLogonUtility, 245

LOGONFolder, 246

My-T-Soft2 - small,medium,large, 244

My-T-Soft2Keyboard,243

My-T-Soft2 TechnicalNotes, 246

610

Index

Windows7, 240WindowsVista, 240

LowerCaseDisplay- INI setting,435

MMacro

Build-A-Macro,197

Macro (Macropanels), 75Macro Key,212Macro PanelDescription,

206Macro PanelDialog, 216Macro PanelID, 205Macro Panels,86

Add APanel, 198DeletePanel, 198DocumentAll Panels,198DocumentPanel, 198

Macro ZoomDialog, 220MacroPanelsToOpensection[MacroPanel-

611

Index

sToOpen](INI file), 568Macros

ActivateKeystrokeMacro, 203Clear Key,215Copy Key,215CreateKeystrokeMacro, 203DeleteMacroPanel, 207DocumentAll MacroPanels, 210DocumentMacro

Panel, 209Editing(Ad-vanced),204LaunchApplica-tion,214OpenMacroPanel, 214Panel De-scription,206Panel ID,205Paste Key,215

Mag(Magnifier

612

Index

panel), 75Magnification,92MagnifierPanel, 92Main MacroPanel, 86,150, 199, 208ManualToolControl- INI setting,488MAX(WindowsControlPanel), 80Memory, 347MenuClassessection[Menu-Classes] (INIfile), 563

MenuForceForeground- INI setting,492

MenuOffset -INI setting,441

Menus -Windowsmenuoperationnotes, 329

messaginginformation,283

MIN(WindowsControlPanel), 80

Minimize(openingminimized) -

613

Index

CommandLine, 348

MinimizeOptions, 100

Button, 100

Icon, 100

TaskbarIcon (tray),100

MinimizeToButton- INI setting,395

MotionDialog Box,153

Mouse

PhysicalMouse, 58

Required,58

Touchscreen/ Pen /PointingDevice, 58

Mouse -Drivers, 59

MouseButtons, 229

MouseButtons - 2 or3-ButtonMouse, 230

MouseButtons - LeftButton (actionbutton), 229

Mouse Driver- 2 or3-ButtonMouse, 230

614

Index

Mouse pointer(cursor), 233

MouseButtonssection[MouseBut-tons] (INIfile), 535

MouseOverHilite- INI setting,473

MSI Install,313

Multi-Touch,94

MYTTOUCH.INIFile Docu-mentation,382

ButtonPosition,397

DebuggingOptions,413

NNew Macro,203

New MacroPanel, 201

NoAnnounce- INI setting,463

NoHooksEver- INI setting,430

NoSplash -INI setting,390

615

Index

Num(KeyboardPanel), 77Num (numeric(keyboard)panel), 75NumPadAlways- INI setting,482

OOff-Screen -Screen-EdgeScroll, 100Opaque, 104Open a panel,75Open MacroPanel, 214

OpenAbout -INI setting,388

OpenCentered- INI setting,389

OpenFirst -INI setting,388

Operation

General, 70

OperationNotes, 327

OperationOptions, 120,127

Operator -DisableMinimize,152

616

Index

OperatorMode, 72OperatorSecurity, 150OperatorNoMin- INI setting,419

PPanel Colors,161Panel Motion,153PanelSelection, 125Panels

CalculatorPanel, 88Closing, 75

ControlPanel, 75KeyboardPanel, 77MacroPanels, 86MagnifierPanel, 92Opening,75Quick HelpPanel, 90Selection,125System In-formationPanel, 90Tool BarPanel, 71TouchPanel, 94

617

Index

WindowControlPanels, 80

PanelWatch,108ParallaxSettings - INIsetting, 522Parameters (toEXE) -CommandLine, 348Password(default), 151Password -INI setting,418Paste (Macroediting), 223Paste(Windows

ControlPanel), 80Paste Key(Macro), 215Patents, 9Pause Key, 54Pens, 59PhysicalKeyboard

BIOSsettings,booting, 58Caps Lockoperation,436Ctrl-Alt-Del,569layout, 172mechanicalemulation,

618

Index

425

NumericKeypadoperationoption, 482

operation,129

PointingDevices

Joysticks,59

Mouse, 59

Pens, 59

Touchscreens,59

Position, 103

Print ScreenKey, 54

ProductCatalog, 62

ProgrammingInformation,283

QQuestions

CommonlyAskedQuestions,50

Quick Help,101Quick HelpPanel, 90Quick Start, 1Quit (Exit)(Close), 75QWERTY(Keyboard

619

Index

Layout), 170

RReact toDialogs andotherWindows, 127ReadOnlyOK- INI setting,486Regionsection[Region] (INIfile), 531Regional(International)settings(KeyboardLayouts and

Windows),179ReleaseInformation,4, 24, 313ReleaseNotes, 265reposition, 70,103requirements,20restart, 569Restart -DeveloperUtilities, 304RestorePosition, 103RestoreSettings, 102RestorePosition- INI setting,

620

Index

405Return toInstallationDefaults, 149ReturnOnScreen- INI setting,529right click,272Right MouseButton, 229Right-Hand(cursor), 233RoundedCorner- INI setting,531

SSave Current

Settings, 102Save Position,103SaveAfterChange- INI setting,493SaveAfterMove- INI setting,493SaveAtClose -INI setting,493SaveAtEndSession- INI setting,493ScanCalculator- INI setting,519ScanColor -INI setting,497

621

Index

ScanControlPanel- INI setting,516

ScanEnableDisableSound- INI setting,497

ScanKeyboardAlpha- INI setting,511

ScanKeyboardEdit- INI setting,514

ScanKeyboardNum- INI setting,515

ScanLeftClickMode- INI setting,503

ScanMacro -INI setting,517

ScanOpenPanels- INI setting,507

ScanOrder -INI setting,508

ScanReverseAfterNumScans- INI setting,505

ScanRightClickMode- INI setting,499

ScanShowAllOptions- INI setting,506

ScanSound -INI setting,496

ScanTime -INI setting,498

622

Index

ScanToolBar -INI setting,516ScanTransparencyLevel- INI setting,498ScanWindowsControls- INI setting,518ScanWordComplete- INI setting,511Screen-EdgeScroll, 100Screen-Saveroptions, 552script -Keystrokemacro, 197Scroll(Screen-

Edge),100ScrollMovePixels- INI setting,476SecondSpace- INI setting,455See Through,104Select All(Macroediting), 223Select Key,138Select KeyModifier, 139SelectKeyboardBackground,163

623

Index

SelectKeyboardLayouts, 170

sequence ofkeystrokes,197

SerialNumber, 1,21, 30

SessionChangeEnabled- INI setting,484

Set Position,103

SetActiveWindowWatch- INI setting,413

Settingssection[Settings] (INIfile), 522

Setup, 4, 44

InstallationOptions,313

ProductInstallation,313

QuietInstall, 313

Setup(Product), 46,102

SetupMode -INI setting,449

SetupSaveSettings- INI setting,416

Shift Keyoperation, 78

624

Index

ShiftLock -INI setting,520Short-Cut, 17short-cuts -menu, 329Show & HideKeys, 123ShowAsGrayed- INI setting,480ShowKeys -INI setting,424SilentInstallation,313SingleKeyPerClick- INI setting,425Size, 99

Size 12,100Size Down,99Size Up, 99

Size - INIsetting, 403SizeSelections,155SizeMax - INIsetting, 404SizeMin - INIsetting, 404SkipTopMostAction- INI setting,413Slide-OutPanels, 153SlideOption -INI setting,

625

Index

403

Snap-OutPanels, 153

Sound - INIsetting, 461

Sounds - KeyClick, 372

SpecialHandling, 144

SpecialOptions, 121,144, 369

Specialsection[Special] (INIfile), 550

Splash(disableopeningsplash) -

CommandLine, 348Splash Screen(openingMy-T-Touch),390standardconfiguration,41standardsettings, 41StartDelay -INI setting,390StartUpgroup, 106Startup ofMy-T-Touch,390StartUpsection

626

Index

[StartUp] (INIfile), 538StayBehindClassessection[StayBehind-Classes] (INIfile), 564Suffixes - INIsetting, 452Suggestions,290Supervisor/Operator,121Support

CustomerSupport, 60website, 60

SysInfosection[SysInfo] (INIfile), 540

SystemColors, 159SystemInformationDisplay, 157SystemInformationPanel, 90Systemrequirements,20

TTablet PCInput Panel,106, 370TabletPCEnabled- INI setting,491

627

Index

Tape key(CalculatorTape), 89

Taskbarbutton, 118

TechnicalDocumenta-tion Section,263

TechnicalNotes, 274

TerminalServer /TerminalServices, 5

TerminalServerConsoleEnable- INI setting,494

Text-To-Speech - noannouncing,

463Theme - INIsetting, 525ThemeList -INI setting,525Themes, 94ThemesFolder- INI setting,526three-buttonmouse, 230Tile(Windows),80Time (SystemInformationpanel), 91Tool BarControl(Manual), 106

628

Index

Tool BarPanel, 71

TopOffset -INI setting,463

Touch Panel,94

Touch Panel(menu), 108

TouchFadeAway- INI setting,530

touchscreens,59

TrackPointingDevice Inputat all times,132

Trademarks, 9

Transparency,104Transparency- INI setting,442TransparencyLevel- INI setting,443TrapDialAKeyCursor- INI setting,393Tray Icon, 118TTSAvailable- INI setting,464TTSDelay -INI setting,466TTSRepeat -INI setting,466

629

Index

TTSScanWordComplete- INI setting,470

TTSSingleCharKey- INI setting,468

TTSSpeakWord- INI setting,467

TTSWordComplete- INI setting,469

TTSWordsKey- INI setting,468

Tutorial, 6,101

TutorialandStandardSettings, 41

two-buttonmouse, 230

TwoButtonMouse- INI setting,406

TypeMatic -INI setting,390

TypematicOperation,128

UUn-Install, 26

Undo (Macroediting), 223

Undo(Windows

630

Index

ControlPanel), 80

Upper CaseCharactersAlways(Keyboard),133

UseFixedArea- INI setting,532

UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo- INI setting,439

User Notes,272

user-definedpanels, 197

Using thisguide, 10

VVersion(history), 265

view thecursor, 53

VirtualMachines -TechnicalNotes, 275

VirtualPointer inUse, 130

VirtualPointer- INI setting,425

visuallyimpaired, 92

631

Index

WWantATVersion- INI setting,449

WantGestures- INI setting,528

WantMultiTouch- INI setting,528

WantTouchPanel- INI setting,528

Wave File -soundintegration,372

website, 60

What isMy-T-Touch,

13

What YouNeed, 20

Why Do INeedMy-T-Touch?,16

Win(WindowsControlspanel), 75

Win2000ShutDown- INI setting,483

Window(minimize),119

WindowContention(reaction), 127

632

Index

WindowsApplications,50

WindowsControlPanels, 80

WindowsControlspanel, 75

WindowsDevelopers,283

WindowsInstaller, 313

WindowsLogon, 243

WindowsMenus, 329

WindowsNotes, 370

WindowsKeysGraphics- INI setting,489WindowsKeyWndsLatch- INI setting,490WindowWatch- INI setting,413without akeyboard, 58WordComplete- INI setting,451

XXParallax -INI setting,522

633

Index

YYParallax -INI setting,522

ZZoom -KeystrokeMacro, 203

634